You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

11234 lines
305KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half of the output video.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
  93. recognized by the @option{-filter}/@option{-vf} and @option{-filter_complex}
  94. options in @command{ffmpeg} and @option{-vf} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  95. @code{avfilter_graph_parse()}/@code{avfilter_graph_parse2()} functions defined in
  96. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  97. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  98. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  99. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  100. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  101. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  102. descriptions.
  103. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  104. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  105. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  106. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  107. the filter classes registered in the program.
  108. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  109. "=@var{arguments}".
  110. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  111. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
  112. @itemize
  113. @item
  114. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  115. @item
  116. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  117. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  118. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  119. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  120. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  121. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  122. @item
  123. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  124. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  125. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  126. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  127. @end itemize
  128. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  129. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  130. '|'.
  131. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "'" as initial
  132. and ending mark, and the character '\' for escaping the characters
  133. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  134. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  135. "[]=;,") is encountered.
  136. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  137. followed by a list of link labels.
  138. A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  139. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  140. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  141. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  142. associated to the output pads.
  143. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  144. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  145. created.
  146. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  147. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  148. For example in the filterchain
  149. @example
  150. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  151. @end example
  152. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  153. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  154. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  155. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  156. which are both unlabelled.
  157. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  158. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  159. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  160. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  161. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  162. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  163. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  164. to the filtergraph description.
  165. Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
  166. @example
  167. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  168. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  169. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  170. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
  171. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  172. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  173. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  174. @end example
  175. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  176. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  177. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  178. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  179. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  180. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  181. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  182. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  183. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  184. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  185. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  186. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  187. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  188. characters contained within it.
  189. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  190. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  191. @example
  192. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  193. @end example
  194. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  195. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  196. @example
  197. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  198. @end example
  199. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  200. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  201. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  202. @example
  203. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  204. @end example
  205. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  206. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  207. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  208. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  209. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  210. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  211. previous string will finally result in:
  212. @example
  213. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  214. @end example
  215. @chapter Timeline editing
  216. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  217. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  218. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  219. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  220. next filter in the filtergraph.
  221. The expression accepts the following values:
  222. @table @samp
  223. @item t
  224. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  225. @item n
  226. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  227. @item pos
  228. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  229. @end table
  230. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  231. to re-define the expression.
  232. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  233. rules.
  234. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  235. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  236. @example
  237. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  238. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  239. @end example
  240. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  241. @chapter Audio Filters
  242. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  243. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  244. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  245. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  246. build.
  247. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  248. @section adelay
  249. Delay one or more audio channels.
  250. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  251. The filter accepts the following option:
  252. @table @option
  253. @item delays
  254. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  255. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  256. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  257. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  258. @end table
  259. @subsection Examples
  260. @itemize
  261. @item
  262. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  263. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  264. @example
  265. adelay=1500|0|500
  266. @end example
  267. @end itemize
  268. @section aecho
  269. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  270. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  271. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  272. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  273. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  274. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  275. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  276. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  277. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  278. @table @option
  279. @item in_gain
  280. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  281. @item out_gain
  282. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  283. @item delays
  284. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  285. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  286. Default is @code{1000}.
  287. @item decays
  288. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  289. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  290. Default is @code{0.5}.
  291. @end table
  292. @subsection Examples
  293. @itemize
  294. @item
  295. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  296. @example
  297. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  298. @end example
  299. @item
  300. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  301. @example
  302. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  303. @end example
  304. @item
  305. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  306. @example
  307. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  308. @end example
  309. @item
  310. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  311. @example
  312. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  313. @end example
  314. @end itemize
  315. @section aeval
  316. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  317. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  318. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  319. It accepts the following parameters:
  320. @table @option
  321. @item exprs
  322. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  323. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  324. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  325. output channels.
  326. @item channel_layout, c
  327. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  328. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  329. use by default the same input channel layout.
  330. @end table
  331. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  332. @table @option
  333. @item ch
  334. channel number of the current expression
  335. @item n
  336. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  337. @item s
  338. sample rate
  339. @item t
  340. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  341. @item nb_in_channels
  342. @item nb_out_channels
  343. input and output number of channels
  344. @item val(CH)
  345. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  346. @end table
  347. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  348. dedicated filter.
  349. @subsection Examples
  350. @itemize
  351. @item
  352. Half volume:
  353. @example
  354. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  355. @end example
  356. @item
  357. Invert phase of the second channel:
  358. @example
  359. aeval=val(0)|-val(1)
  360. @end example
  361. @end itemize
  362. @section afade
  363. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  364. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  365. @table @option
  366. @item type, t
  367. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  368. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  369. @item start_sample, ss
  370. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  371. effect. Default is 0.
  372. @item nb_samples, ns
  373. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  374. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  375. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  376. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  377. @item start_time, st
  378. Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
  379. The value must be specified as a time duration; see
  380. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  381. for the accepted syntax.
  382. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample}.
  383. @item duration, d
  384. Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
  385. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  386. for the accepted syntax.
  387. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  388. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  389. the output audio will be silence.
  390. By default the duration is determined by @var{nb_samples}.
  391. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples}.
  392. @item curve
  393. Set curve for fade transition.
  394. It accepts the following values:
  395. @table @option
  396. @item tri
  397. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  398. @item qsin
  399. select quarter of sine wave
  400. @item hsin
  401. select half of sine wave
  402. @item esin
  403. select exponential sine wave
  404. @item log
  405. select logarithmic
  406. @item par
  407. select inverted parabola
  408. @item qua
  409. select quadratic
  410. @item cub
  411. select cubic
  412. @item squ
  413. select square root
  414. @item cbr
  415. select cubic root
  416. @end table
  417. @end table
  418. @subsection Examples
  419. @itemize
  420. @item
  421. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  422. @example
  423. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  424. @end example
  425. @item
  426. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  427. @example
  428. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  429. @end example
  430. @end itemize
  431. @anchor{aformat}
  432. @section aformat
  433. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  434. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  435. It accepts the following parameters:
  436. @table @option
  437. @item sample_fmts
  438. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  439. @item sample_rates
  440. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  441. @item channel_layouts
  442. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  443. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  444. for the required syntax.
  445. @end table
  446. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  447. Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
  448. @example
  449. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  450. @end example
  451. @section allpass
  452. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  453. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  454. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  455. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  456. The filter accepts the following options:
  457. @table @option
  458. @item frequency, f
  459. Set frequency in Hz.
  460. @item width_type
  461. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  462. @table @option
  463. @item h
  464. Hz
  465. @item q
  466. Q-Factor
  467. @item o
  468. octave
  469. @item s
  470. slope
  471. @end table
  472. @item width, w
  473. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  474. @end table
  475. @section amerge
  476. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  477. The filter accepts the following options:
  478. @table @option
  479. @item inputs
  480. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  481. @end table
  482. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  483. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  484. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  485. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  486. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  487. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  488. channels.
  489. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  490. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  491. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  492. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  493. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  494. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  495. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  496. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  497. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  498. shortest.
  499. @subsection Examples
  500. @itemize
  501. @item
  502. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  503. @example
  504. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  505. @end example
  506. @item
  507. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  508. @example
  509. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  510. @end example
  511. @end itemize
  512. @section amix
  513. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  514. Note that this filter only supports float samples (the @var{amerge}
  515. and @var{pan} audio filters support many formats). If the @var{amix}
  516. input has integer samples then @ref{aresample} will be automatically
  517. inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
  518. For example
  519. @example
  520. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  521. @end example
  522. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  523. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  524. It accepts the following parameters:
  525. @table @option
  526. @item inputs
  527. The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  528. @item duration
  529. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  530. @table @option
  531. @item longest
  532. The duration of the longest input. (default)
  533. @item shortest
  534. The duration of the shortest input.
  535. @item first
  536. The duration of the first input.
  537. @end table
  538. @item dropout_transition
  539. The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  540. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  541. @end table
  542. @section anull
  543. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  544. @section apad
  545. Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
  546. This can be used together with @command{ffmpeg} @option{-shortest} to
  547. extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  548. A description of the accepted options follows.
  549. @table @option
  550. @item packet_size
  551. Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
  552. @item pad_len
  553. Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
  554. value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
  555. exclusive with @option{whole_len}.
  556. @item whole_len
  557. Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
  558. the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
  559. the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
  560. with @option{pad_len}.
  561. @end table
  562. If neither the @option{pad_len} nor the @option{whole_len} option is
  563. set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
  564. indefinitely.
  565. @subsection Examples
  566. @itemize
  567. @item
  568. Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
  569. @example
  570. apad=pad_len=1024
  571. @end example
  572. @item
  573. Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
  574. the input with silence if required:
  575. @example
  576. apad=whole_len=10000
  577. @end example
  578. @item
  579. Use @command{ffmpeg} to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
  580. video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
  581. until the end in the output file when using the @option{shortest}
  582. option:
  583. @example
  584. ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
  585. @end example
  586. @end itemize
  587. @section aphaser
  588. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  589. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  590. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  591. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  592. @table @option
  593. @item in_gain
  594. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  595. @item out_gain
  596. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  597. @item delay
  598. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  599. @item decay
  600. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  601. @item speed
  602. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  603. @item type
  604. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  605. It accepts the following values:
  606. @table @samp
  607. @item triangular, t
  608. @item sinusoidal, s
  609. @end table
  610. @end table
  611. @anchor{aresample}
  612. @section aresample
  613. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  614. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  615. automatically convert between its input and output.
  616. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  617. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  618. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  619. The filter accepts the syntax
  620. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  621. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  622. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  623. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  624. @subsection Examples
  625. @itemize
  626. @item
  627. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  628. @example
  629. aresample=44100
  630. @end example
  631. @item
  632. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  633. samples per second compensation:
  634. @example
  635. aresample=async=1000
  636. @end example
  637. @end itemize
  638. @section asetnsamples
  639. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  640. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  641. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  642. signal its end.
  643. The filter accepts the following options:
  644. @table @option
  645. @item nb_out_samples, n
  646. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  647. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  648. Default value is 1024.
  649. @item pad, p
  650. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  651. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  652. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  653. @end table
  654. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  655. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  656. @example
  657. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  658. @end example
  659. @section asetrate
  660. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  661. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  662. The filter accepts the following options:
  663. @table @option
  664. @item sample_rate, r
  665. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  666. @end table
  667. @section ashowinfo
  668. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  669. The input audio is not modified.
  670. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  671. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  672. The following values are shown in the output:
  673. @table @option
  674. @item n
  675. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  676. @item pts
  677. The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  678. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  679. @item pts_time
  680. The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
  681. @item pos
  682. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  683. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  684. @item fmt
  685. The sample format.
  686. @item chlayout
  687. The channel layout.
  688. @item rate
  689. The sample rate for the audio frame.
  690. @item nb_samples
  691. The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
  692. @item checksum
  693. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
  694. audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  695. @item plane_checksums
  696. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  697. @end table
  698. @section astats
  699. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  700. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  701. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  702. It accepts the following option:
  703. @table @option
  704. @item length
  705. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  706. Default is @code{0.05} (50 miliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  707. @end table
  708. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  709. @table @option
  710. @item DC offset
  711. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  712. @item Min level
  713. Minimal sample level.
  714. @item Max level
  715. Maximal sample level.
  716. @item Peak level dB
  717. @item RMS level dB
  718. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  719. @item RMS peak dB
  720. @item RMS trough dB
  721. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  722. @item Crest factor
  723. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  724. @item Flat factor
  725. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  726. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  727. @item Peak count
  728. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  729. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  730. @end table
  731. @section astreamsync
  732. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  733. The filter accepts the following options:
  734. @table @option
  735. @item expr, e
  736. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  737. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  738. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  739. the following variables:
  740. @table @var
  741. @item b1 b2
  742. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  743. @item s1 s2
  744. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  745. @item t1 t2
  746. current timestamp of each stream
  747. @end table
  748. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  749. that has a smaller timestamp.
  750. @end table
  751. @subsection Examples
  752. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  753. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  754. @example
  755. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  756. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  757. [a2] [b2] amerge
  758. @end example
  759. @section asyncts
  760. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  761. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  762. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  763. It accepts the following parameters:
  764. @table @option
  765. @item compensate
  766. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  767. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  768. @item min_delta
  769. The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  770. adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
  771. sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  772. @item max_comp
  773. The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
  774. The default value is 500.
  775. @item first_pts
  776. Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
  777. rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
  778. no assumption is made about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or
  779. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  780. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  781. with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
  782. @end table
  783. @section atempo
  784. Adjust audio tempo.
  785. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  786. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  787. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  788. @subsection Examples
  789. @itemize
  790. @item
  791. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  792. @example
  793. atempo=0.8
  794. @end example
  795. @item
  796. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  797. @example
  798. atempo=1.25
  799. @end example
  800. @end itemize
  801. @section atrim
  802. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  803. It accepts the following parameters:
  804. @table @option
  805. @item start
  806. Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
  807. sample with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  808. @item end
  809. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  810. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  811. the last sample in the output.
  812. @item start_pts
  813. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  814. instead of seconds.
  815. @item end_pts
  816. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  817. of seconds.
  818. @item duration
  819. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  820. @item start_sample
  821. The number of the first sample that should be output.
  822. @item end_sample
  823. The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  824. @end table
  825. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  826. duration specifications; see
  827. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  828. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  829. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  830. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  831. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  832. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  833. to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  834. atrim filter.
  835. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  836. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  837. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  838. filters.
  839. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  840. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  841. Examples:
  842. @itemize
  843. @item
  844. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  845. @example
  846. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  847. @end example
  848. @item
  849. Keep only the first 1000 samples:
  850. @example
  851. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  852. @end example
  853. @end itemize
  854. @section bandpass
  855. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  856. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  857. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  858. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  859. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  860. The filter accepts the following options:
  861. @table @option
  862. @item frequency, f
  863. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  864. @item csg
  865. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  866. @item width_type
  867. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  868. @table @option
  869. @item h
  870. Hz
  871. @item q
  872. Q-Factor
  873. @item o
  874. octave
  875. @item s
  876. slope
  877. @end table
  878. @item width, w
  879. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  880. @end table
  881. @section bandreject
  882. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  883. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  884. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  885. The filter accepts the following options:
  886. @table @option
  887. @item frequency, f
  888. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  889. @item width_type
  890. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  891. @table @option
  892. @item h
  893. Hz
  894. @item q
  895. Q-Factor
  896. @item o
  897. octave
  898. @item s
  899. slope
  900. @end table
  901. @item width, w
  902. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  903. @end table
  904. @section bass
  905. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  906. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  907. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  908. The filter accepts the following options:
  909. @table @option
  910. @item gain, g
  911. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  912. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  913. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  914. @item frequency, f
  915. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  916. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  917. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  918. @item width_type
  919. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  920. @table @option
  921. @item h
  922. Hz
  923. @item q
  924. Q-Factor
  925. @item o
  926. octave
  927. @item s
  928. slope
  929. @end table
  930. @item width, w
  931. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  932. @end table
  933. @section biquad
  934. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  935. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  936. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  937. @section bs2b
  938. Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
  939. stereo audio records.
  940. It accepts the following parameters:
  941. @table @option
  942. @item profile
  943. Pre-defined crossfeed level.
  944. @table @option
  945. @item default
  946. Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
  947. @item cmoy
  948. Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
  949. @item jmeier
  950. Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
  951. @end table
  952. @item fcut
  953. Cut frequency (in Hz).
  954. @item feed
  955. Feed level (in Hz).
  956. @end table
  957. @section channelmap
  958. Remap input channels to new locations.
  959. It accepts the following parameters:
  960. @table @option
  961. @item channel_layout
  962. The channel layout of the output stream.
  963. @item map
  964. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  965. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  966. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  967. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  968. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  969. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  970. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  971. @end table
  972. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  973. output channels, preserving indices.
  974. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
  975. @example
  976. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  977. @end example
  978. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  979. the input.
  980. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  981. @example
  982. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  983. @end example
  984. @section channelsplit
  985. Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  986. It accepts the following parameters:
  987. @table @option
  988. @item channel_layout
  989. The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
  990. @end table
  991. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
  992. @example
  993. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  994. @end example
  995. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  996. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  997. Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
  998. @example
  999. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  1000. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  1001. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  1002. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  1003. side_right.wav
  1004. @end example
  1005. @section compand
  1006. Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.
  1007. It accepts the following parameters:
  1008. @table @option
  1009. @item attacks
  1010. @item decays
  1011. A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  1012. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  1013. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  1014. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  1015. shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  1016. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  1017. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  1018. @item points
  1019. A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  1020. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  1021. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  1022. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  1023. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  1024. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  1025. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  1026. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  1027. @item soft-knee
  1028. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
  1029. @item gain
  1030. Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
  1031. function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
  1032. It defaults to 0.
  1033. @item volume
  1034. Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
  1035. starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1036. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1037. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1038. quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
  1039. @item delay
  1040. Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1041. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1042. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1043. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
  1044. @end table
  1045. @subsection Examples
  1046. @itemize
  1047. @item
  1048. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
  1049. noisy environment:
  1050. @example
  1051. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1052. @end example
  1053. @item
  1054. A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1055. @example
  1056. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1057. @end example
  1058. @item
  1059. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1060. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1061. @example
  1062. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1063. @end example
  1064. @end itemize
  1065. @section earwax
  1066. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1067. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1068. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1069. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1070. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1071. Ported from SoX.
  1072. @section equalizer
  1073. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1074. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1075. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1076. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1077. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1078. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1079. The filter accepts the following options:
  1080. @table @option
  1081. @item frequency, f
  1082. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1083. @item width_type
  1084. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1085. @table @option
  1086. @item h
  1087. Hz
  1088. @item q
  1089. Q-Factor
  1090. @item o
  1091. octave
  1092. @item s
  1093. slope
  1094. @end table
  1095. @item width, w
  1096. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1097. @item gain, g
  1098. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1099. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1100. @end table
  1101. @subsection Examples
  1102. @itemize
  1103. @item
  1104. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1105. @example
  1106. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1107. @end example
  1108. @item
  1109. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1110. @example
  1111. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1112. @end example
  1113. @end itemize
  1114. @section flanger
  1115. Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
  1116. The filter accepts the following options:
  1117. @table @option
  1118. @item delay
  1119. Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
  1120. @item depth
  1121. Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
  1122. @item regen
  1123. Set percentage regeneneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
  1124. Default value is 0.
  1125. @item width
  1126. Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
  1127. Default valu is 71.
  1128. @item speed
  1129. Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
  1130. @item shape
  1131. Set swept wave shape, can be @var{triangular} or @var{sinusoidal}.
  1132. Default value is @var{sinusoidal}.
  1133. @item phase
  1134. Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
  1135. Default value is 25.
  1136. @item interp
  1137. Set delay-line interpolation, @var{linear} or @var{quadratic}.
  1138. Default is @var{linear}.
  1139. @end table
  1140. @section highpass
  1141. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1142. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1143. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1144. The filter accepts the following options:
  1145. @table @option
  1146. @item frequency, f
  1147. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1148. @item poles, p
  1149. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1150. @item width_type
  1151. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1152. @table @option
  1153. @item h
  1154. Hz
  1155. @item q
  1156. Q-Factor
  1157. @item o
  1158. octave
  1159. @item s
  1160. slope
  1161. @end table
  1162. @item width, w
  1163. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1164. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1165. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1166. @end table
  1167. @section join
  1168. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1169. It accepts the following parameters:
  1170. @table @option
  1171. @item inputs
  1172. The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
  1173. @item channel_layout
  1174. The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
  1175. @item map
  1176. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1177. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1178. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1179. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1180. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1181. channel.
  1182. @end table
  1183. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
  1184. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1185. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1186. Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
  1187. @example
  1188. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1189. @end example
  1190. Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1191. @example
  1192. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1193. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1194. out
  1195. @end example
  1196. @section ladspa
  1197. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1198. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1199. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1200. @table @option
  1201. @item file, f
  1202. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1203. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1204. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1205. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1206. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1207. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1208. @item plugin, p
  1209. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1210. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1211. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1212. @item controls, c
  1213. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1214. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1215. threshold or gain).
  1216. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1217. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1218. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1219. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1220. their valid ranges are printed.
  1221. @item sample_rate, s
  1222. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1223. zero inputs.
  1224. @item nb_samples, n
  1225. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1226. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1227. @item duration, d
  1228. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1229. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1230. for the accepted syntax.
  1231. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1232. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1233. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1234. supposed to be generated forever.
  1235. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1236. @end table
  1237. @subsection Examples
  1238. @itemize
  1239. @item
  1240. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1241. @example
  1242. ladspa=file=amp
  1243. @end example
  1244. @item
  1245. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1246. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1247. @example
  1248. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1249. @end example
  1250. @item
  1251. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1252. plugin library:
  1253. @example
  1254. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1255. @end example
  1256. @item
  1257. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1258. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1259. @example
  1260. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1261. @end example
  1262. @item
  1263. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1264. @example
  1265. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1266. @end example
  1267. @item
  1268. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1269. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1270. @example
  1271. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1272. @end example
  1273. @item
  1274. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1275. @example
  1276. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1277. @end example
  1278. @end itemize
  1279. @subsection Commands
  1280. This filter supports the following commands:
  1281. @table @option
  1282. @item cN
  1283. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1284. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1285. @end table
  1286. @section lowpass
  1287. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1288. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1289. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1290. The filter accepts the following options:
  1291. @table @option
  1292. @item frequency, f
  1293. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1294. @item poles, p
  1295. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1296. @item width_type
  1297. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1298. @table @option
  1299. @item h
  1300. Hz
  1301. @item q
  1302. Q-Factor
  1303. @item o
  1304. octave
  1305. @item s
  1306. slope
  1307. @end table
  1308. @item width, w
  1309. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1310. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1311. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1312. @end table
  1313. @section pan
  1314. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1315. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1316. This filter is also designed to remap efficiently the channels of an audio
  1317. stream.
  1318. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1319. "@var{l}:@var{outdef}:@var{outdef}:..."
  1320. @table @option
  1321. @item l
  1322. output channel layout or number of channels
  1323. @item outdef
  1324. output channel specification, of the form:
  1325. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1326. @item out_name
  1327. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1328. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1329. @item gain
  1330. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1331. @item in_name
  1332. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1333. named and numbered input channels
  1334. @end table
  1335. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1336. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1337. avoiding clipping noise.
  1338. @subsection Mixing examples
  1339. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1340. factor for the left channel:
  1341. @example
  1342. pan=1:c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1343. @end example
  1344. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1345. 7-channels surround:
  1346. @example
  1347. pan=stereo: FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL : FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1348. @end example
  1349. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1350. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1351. needs.
  1352. @subsection Remapping examples
  1353. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1354. @itemize
  1355. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1356. @item only one input per channel output,
  1357. @end itemize
  1358. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1359. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1360. remapping.
  1361. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1362. dropping the extra channels:
  1363. @example
  1364. pan="stereo: c0=FL : c1=FR"
  1365. @end example
  1366. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1367. and keep the input channel layout:
  1368. @example
  1369. pan="5.1: c0=c1 : c1=c0 : c2=c2 : c3=c3 : c4=c4 : c5=c5"
  1370. @end example
  1371. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1372. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1373. @example
  1374. pan="stereo:c1=c1"
  1375. @end example
  1376. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1377. front left and right:
  1378. @example
  1379. pan="stereo: c0=FR : c1=FR"
  1380. @end example
  1381. @section replaygain
  1382. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1383. outputs it unchanged.
  1384. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1385. @section resample
  1386. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
  1387. not meant to be used directly.
  1388. @section silencedetect
  1389. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1390. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1391. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1392. minimum detected noise duration.
  1393. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1394. The filter accepts the following options:
  1395. @table @option
  1396. @item duration, d
  1397. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1398. @item noise, n
  1399. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1400. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1401. @end table
  1402. @subsection Examples
  1403. @itemize
  1404. @item
  1405. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1406. @example
  1407. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1408. @end example
  1409. @item
  1410. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1411. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1412. @example
  1413. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1414. @end example
  1415. @end itemize
  1416. @section silenceremove
  1417. Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
  1418. The filter accepts the following options:
  1419. @table @option
  1420. @item start_periods
  1421. This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
  1422. the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
  1423. beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
  1424. finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
  1425. the @var{start_periods} will be @code{1} but it can be increased to higher
  1426. values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
  1427. Default value is @code{0}.
  1428. @item start_duration
  1429. Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
  1430. trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
  1431. as silence and trimmed off. Default value is @code{0}.
  1432. @item start_threshold
  1433. This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
  1434. audio, a value of @code{0} may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
  1435. you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
  1436. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1437. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1438. @item stop_periods
  1439. Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
  1440. To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a @var{stop_periods}
  1441. that is negative. This value is then threated as a positive value and is
  1442. used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
  1443. @var{start_periods}, making it suitable for removing periods of silence
  1444. in the middle of the audio.
  1445. Default value is @code{0}.
  1446. @item stop_duration
  1447. Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
  1448. more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
  1449. the audio.
  1450. Default value is @code{0}.
  1451. @item stop_threshold
  1452. This is the same as @option{start_threshold} but for trimming silence from
  1453. the end of audio.
  1454. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1455. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1456. @item leave_silence
  1457. This indicate that @var{stop_duration} length of audio should be left intact
  1458. at the beginning of each period of silence.
  1459. For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
  1460. to remove the pauses completely. Default value is @code{0}.
  1461. @end table
  1462. @subsection Examples
  1463. @itemize
  1464. @item
  1465. The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
  1466. that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
  1467. pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
  1468. @example
  1469. silenceremove=1:5:0.02
  1470. @end example
  1471. @end itemize
  1472. @section treble
  1473. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1474. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1475. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1476. The filter accepts the following options:
  1477. @table @option
  1478. @item gain, g
  1479. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1480. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1481. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1482. @item frequency, f
  1483. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1484. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1485. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1486. @item width_type
  1487. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1488. @table @option
  1489. @item h
  1490. Hz
  1491. @item q
  1492. Q-Factor
  1493. @item o
  1494. octave
  1495. @item s
  1496. slope
  1497. @end table
  1498. @item width, w
  1499. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1500. @end table
  1501. @section volume
  1502. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1503. It accepts the following parameters:
  1504. @table @option
  1505. @item volume
  1506. Set audio volume expression.
  1507. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1508. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1509. @example
  1510. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1511. @end example
  1512. The default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1513. @item precision
  1514. This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
  1515. It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1516. precision of the volume scaling.
  1517. @table @option
  1518. @item fixed
  1519. 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1520. @item float
  1521. 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1522. @item double
  1523. 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
  1524. @end table
  1525. @item replaygain
  1526. Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
  1527. @table @option
  1528. @item drop
  1529. Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
  1530. @item ignore
  1531. Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
  1532. @item track
  1533. Prefer the track gain, if present.
  1534. @item album
  1535. Prefer the album gain, if present.
  1536. @end table
  1537. @item replaygain_preamp
  1538. Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
  1539. Default value for @var{replaygain_preamp} is 0.0.
  1540. @item eval
  1541. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1542. It accepts the following values:
  1543. @table @samp
  1544. @item once
  1545. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1546. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1547. @item frame
  1548. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1549. @end table
  1550. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1551. @end table
  1552. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1553. @table @option
  1554. @item n
  1555. frame number (starting at zero)
  1556. @item nb_channels
  1557. number of channels
  1558. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1559. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1560. @item nb_samples
  1561. number of samples in the current frame
  1562. @item pos
  1563. original frame position in the file
  1564. @item pts
  1565. frame PTS
  1566. @item sample_rate
  1567. sample rate
  1568. @item startpts
  1569. PTS at start of stream
  1570. @item startt
  1571. time at start of stream
  1572. @item t
  1573. frame time
  1574. @item tb
  1575. timestamp timebase
  1576. @item volume
  1577. last set volume value
  1578. @end table
  1579. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1580. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1581. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1582. @subsection Commands
  1583. This filter supports the following commands:
  1584. @table @option
  1585. @item volume
  1586. Modify the volume expression.
  1587. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1588. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1589. value.
  1590. @item replaygain_noclip
  1591. Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
  1592. Default value for @var{replaygain_noclip} is 1.
  1593. @end table
  1594. @subsection Examples
  1595. @itemize
  1596. @item
  1597. Halve the input audio volume:
  1598. @example
  1599. volume=volume=0.5
  1600. volume=volume=1/2
  1601. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1602. @end example
  1603. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1604. omitted, for example like in:
  1605. @example
  1606. volume=0.5
  1607. @end example
  1608. @item
  1609. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1610. @example
  1611. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1612. @end example
  1613. @item
  1614. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1615. @example
  1616. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1617. @end example
  1618. @end itemize
  1619. @section volumedetect
  1620. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1621. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1622. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1623. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1624. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1625. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1626. the samples).
  1627. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1628. @subsection Examples
  1629. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1630. @example
  1631. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1632. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1633. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1634. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1635. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1636. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1637. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1638. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1639. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1640. @end example
  1641. It means that:
  1642. @itemize
  1643. @item
  1644. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1645. @item
  1646. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1647. @item
  1648. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1649. @end itemize
  1650. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1651. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1652. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1653. @chapter Audio Sources
  1654. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1655. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1656. @section abuffer
  1657. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1658. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1659. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1660. It accepts the following parameters:
  1661. @table @option
  1662. @item time_base
  1663. The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1664. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1665. @item sample_rate
  1666. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1667. @item sample_fmt
  1668. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1669. Either a sample format name or its corresponging integer representation from
  1670. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1671. @item channel_layout
  1672. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1673. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1674. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1675. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1676. @item channels
  1677. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1678. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1679. must be consistent.
  1680. @end table
  1681. @subsection Examples
  1682. @example
  1683. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1684. @end example
  1685. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1686. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1687. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1688. equivalent to:
  1689. @example
  1690. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1691. @end example
  1692. @section aevalsrc
  1693. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1694. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1695. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1696. audio signal.
  1697. This source accepts the following options:
  1698. @table @option
  1699. @item exprs
  1700. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1701. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1702. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1703. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1704. @item channel_layout, c
  1705. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1706. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1707. @item duration, d
  1708. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1709. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1710. for the accepted syntax.
  1711. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1712. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1713. complete frame.
  1714. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1715. supposed to be generated forever.
  1716. @item nb_samples, n
  1717. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1718. default to 1024.
  1719. @item sample_rate, s
  1720. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1721. @end table
  1722. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1723. @table @option
  1724. @item n
  1725. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1726. @item t
  1727. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1728. @item s
  1729. sample rate
  1730. @end table
  1731. @subsection Examples
  1732. @itemize
  1733. @item
  1734. Generate silence:
  1735. @example
  1736. aevalsrc=0
  1737. @end example
  1738. @item
  1739. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1740. 8000 Hz:
  1741. @example
  1742. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1743. @end example
  1744. @item
  1745. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1746. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1747. @example
  1748. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1749. @end example
  1750. @item
  1751. Generate white noise:
  1752. @example
  1753. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1754. @end example
  1755. @item
  1756. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1757. @example
  1758. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1759. @end example
  1760. @item
  1761. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1762. @example
  1763. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1764. @end example
  1765. @end itemize
  1766. @section anullsrc
  1767. The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1768. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1769. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1770. synth filter).
  1771. This source accepts the following options:
  1772. @table @option
  1773. @item channel_layout, cl
  1774. Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1775. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1776. is "stereo".
  1777. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1778. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1779. channel layout values.
  1780. @item sample_rate, r
  1781. Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1782. @item nb_samples, n
  1783. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1784. @end table
  1785. @subsection Examples
  1786. @itemize
  1787. @item
  1788. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1789. @example
  1790. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1791. @end example
  1792. @item
  1793. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1794. @example
  1795. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1796. @end example
  1797. @end itemize
  1798. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1799. @section flite
  1800. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1801. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1802. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1803. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1804. The filter accepts the following options:
  1805. @table @option
  1806. @item list_voices
  1807. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1808. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1809. @item nb_samples, n
  1810. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1811. @item textfile
  1812. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1813. @item text
  1814. Set the text to speak.
  1815. @item voice, v
  1816. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1817. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1818. @end table
  1819. @subsection Examples
  1820. @itemize
  1821. @item
  1822. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthetize the text using the
  1823. standard flite voice:
  1824. @example
  1825. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1826. @end example
  1827. @item
  1828. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1829. @example
  1830. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1831. @end example
  1832. @item
  1833. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1834. @example
  1835. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1836. @end example
  1837. @item
  1838. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1839. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1840. @example
  1841. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1842. @end example
  1843. @end itemize
  1844. For more information about libflite, check:
  1845. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1846. @section sine
  1847. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1848. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1849. The filter accepts the following options:
  1850. @table @option
  1851. @item frequency, f
  1852. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1853. @item beep_factor, b
  1854. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1855. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1856. @item sample_rate, r
  1857. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1858. @item duration, d
  1859. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1860. @item samples_per_frame
  1861. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1862. @end table
  1863. @subsection Examples
  1864. @itemize
  1865. @item
  1866. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1867. @example
  1868. sine
  1869. @end example
  1870. @item
  1871. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1872. @example
  1873. sine=220:4:d=5
  1874. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1875. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1876. @end example
  1877. @end itemize
  1878. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1879. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1880. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1881. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1882. @section abuffersink
  1883. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1884. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1885. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1886. or the options system.
  1887. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1888. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1889. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1890. @section anullsink
  1891. Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1892. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  1893. tools.
  1894. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1895. @chapter Video Filters
  1896. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1897. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1898. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1899. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1900. build.
  1901. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1902. @section alphaextract
  1903. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1904. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1905. @section alphamerge
  1906. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1907. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1908. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1909. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1910. channel.
  1911. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1912. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1913. @example
  1914. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1915. @end example
  1916. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1917. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1918. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1919. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1920. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1921. @section ass
  1922. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1923. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1924. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1925. This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
  1926. the @ref{subtitles} filter:
  1927. @table @option
  1928. @item shaping
  1929. Set the shaping engine
  1930. Available values are:
  1931. @table @samp
  1932. @item auto
  1933. The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
  1934. @item simple
  1935. Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
  1936. @item complex
  1937. Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
  1938. @end table
  1939. The default is @code{auto}.
  1940. @end table
  1941. @section bbox
  1942. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1943. luminance plane.
  1944. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1945. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1946. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1947. log.
  1948. The filter accepts the following option:
  1949. @table @option
  1950. @item min_val
  1951. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1952. @end table
  1953. @section blackdetect
  1954. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1955. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1956. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1957. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1958. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1959. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1960. The filter accepts the following options:
  1961. @table @option
  1962. @item black_min_duration, d
  1963. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1964. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1965. Default value is 2.0.
  1966. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1967. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1968. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1969. @example
  1970. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1971. @end example
  1972. for which a picture is considered black.
  1973. Default value is 0.98.
  1974. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1975. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1976. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1977. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  1978. the following equation:
  1979. @example
  1980. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  1981. @end example
  1982. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  1983. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  1984. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  1985. Default value is 0.10.
  1986. @end table
  1987. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  1988. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  1989. @example
  1990. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  1991. @end example
  1992. @section blackframe
  1993. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  1994. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  1995. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  1996. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  1997. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1998. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1999. It accepts the following parameters:
  2000. @table @option
  2001. @item amount
  2002. The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
  2003. @code{98}.
  2004. @item threshold, thresh
  2005. The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
  2006. @code{32}.
  2007. @end table
  2008. @section blend
  2009. Blend two video frames into each other.
  2010. It takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
  2011. "top" layer and second input is "bottom" layer.
  2012. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  2013. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2014. @table @option
  2015. @item c0_mode
  2016. @item c1_mode
  2017. @item c2_mode
  2018. @item c3_mode
  2019. @item all_mode
  2020. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2021. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  2022. Available values for component modes are:
  2023. @table @samp
  2024. @item addition
  2025. @item and
  2026. @item average
  2027. @item burn
  2028. @item darken
  2029. @item difference
  2030. @item divide
  2031. @item dodge
  2032. @item exclusion
  2033. @item hardlight
  2034. @item lighten
  2035. @item multiply
  2036. @item negation
  2037. @item normal
  2038. @item or
  2039. @item overlay
  2040. @item phoenix
  2041. @item pinlight
  2042. @item reflect
  2043. @item screen
  2044. @item softlight
  2045. @item subtract
  2046. @item vividlight
  2047. @item xor
  2048. @end table
  2049. @item c0_opacity
  2050. @item c1_opacity
  2051. @item c2_opacity
  2052. @item c3_opacity
  2053. @item all_opacity
  2054. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2055. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  2056. @item c0_expr
  2057. @item c1_expr
  2058. @item c2_expr
  2059. @item c3_expr
  2060. @item all_expr
  2061. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2062. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  2063. The expressions can use the following variables:
  2064. @table @option
  2065. @item N
  2066. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  2067. @item X
  2068. @item Y
  2069. the coordinates of the current sample
  2070. @item W
  2071. @item H
  2072. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  2073. @item SW
  2074. @item SH
  2075. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  2076. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  2077. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  2078. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  2079. @item T
  2080. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  2081. @item TOP, A
  2082. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  2083. @item BOTTOM, B
  2084. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  2085. @end table
  2086. @item shortest
  2087. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  2088. @item repeatlast
  2089. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  2090. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  2091. Default is @code{1}.
  2092. @end table
  2093. @subsection Examples
  2094. @itemize
  2095. @item
  2096. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  2097. @example
  2098. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  2099. @end example
  2100. @item
  2101. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  2102. @example
  2103. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  2104. @end example
  2105. @item
  2106. Apply uncover left effect:
  2107. @example
  2108. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  2109. @end example
  2110. @item
  2111. Apply uncover down effect:
  2112. @example
  2113. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  2114. @end example
  2115. @item
  2116. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  2117. @example
  2118. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  2119. @end example
  2120. @end itemize
  2121. @section boxblur
  2122. Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  2123. It accepts the following parameters:
  2124. @table @option
  2125. @item luma_radius, lr
  2126. @item luma_power, lp
  2127. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2128. @item chroma_power, cp
  2129. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2130. @item alpha_power, ap
  2131. @end table
  2132. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2133. @table @option
  2134. @item luma_radius, lr
  2135. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2136. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2137. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  2138. corresponding input plane.
  2139. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  2140. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  2141. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  2142. planes.
  2143. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  2144. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  2145. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  2146. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  2147. @table @option
  2148. @item w
  2149. @item h
  2150. The input width and height in pixels.
  2151. @item cw
  2152. @item ch
  2153. The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
  2154. @item hsub
  2155. @item vsub
  2156. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  2157. pixel format "yuv422p", @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2158. @end table
  2159. @item luma_power, lp
  2160. @item chroma_power, cp
  2161. @item alpha_power, ap
  2162. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2163. corresponding plane.
  2164. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2165. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2166. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2167. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2168. @end table
  2169. @subsection Examples
  2170. @itemize
  2171. @item
  2172. Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
  2173. set to 2:
  2174. @example
  2175. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2176. boxblur=2:1
  2177. @end example
  2178. @item
  2179. Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2180. @example
  2181. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2182. @end example
  2183. @item
  2184. Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2185. @example
  2186. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2187. @end example
  2188. @end itemize
  2189. @section codecview
  2190. Visualize information exported by some codecs.
  2191. Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
  2192. means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
  2193. @var{export_mvs} flag in the codec @option{flags2} option.
  2194. The filter accepts the following option:
  2195. @table @option
  2196. @item mv
  2197. Set motion vectors to visualize.
  2198. Available flags for @var{mv} are:
  2199. @table @samp
  2200. @item pf
  2201. forward predicted MVs of P-frames
  2202. @item bf
  2203. forward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2204. @item bb
  2205. backward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2206. @end table
  2207. @end table
  2208. @subsection Examples
  2209. @itemize
  2210. @item
  2211. Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using @command{ffplay}:
  2212. @example
  2213. ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
  2214. @end example
  2215. @end itemize
  2216. @section colorbalance
  2217. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2218. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2219. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2220. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2221. value towards the complementary color.
  2222. The filter accepts the following options:
  2223. @table @option
  2224. @item rs
  2225. @item gs
  2226. @item bs
  2227. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2228. @item rm
  2229. @item gm
  2230. @item bm
  2231. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2232. @item rh
  2233. @item gh
  2234. @item bh
  2235. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2236. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2237. @end table
  2238. @subsection Examples
  2239. @itemize
  2240. @item
  2241. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2242. @example
  2243. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2244. @end example
  2245. @end itemize
  2246. @section colorchannelmixer
  2247. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2248. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2249. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2250. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2251. @example
  2252. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2253. @end example
  2254. The filter accepts the following options:
  2255. @table @option
  2256. @item rr
  2257. @item rg
  2258. @item rb
  2259. @item ra
  2260. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2261. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2262. @item gr
  2263. @item gg
  2264. @item gb
  2265. @item ga
  2266. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2267. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2268. @item br
  2269. @item bg
  2270. @item bb
  2271. @item ba
  2272. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2273. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2274. @item ar
  2275. @item ag
  2276. @item ab
  2277. @item aa
  2278. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2279. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2280. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2281. @end table
  2282. @subsection Examples
  2283. @itemize
  2284. @item
  2285. Convert source to grayscale:
  2286. @example
  2287. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2288. @end example
  2289. @item
  2290. Simulate sepia tones:
  2291. @example
  2292. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2293. @end example
  2294. @end itemize
  2295. @section colormatrix
  2296. Convert color matrix.
  2297. The filter accepts the following options:
  2298. @table @option
  2299. @item src
  2300. @item dst
  2301. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2302. specified.
  2303. The accepted values are:
  2304. @table @samp
  2305. @item bt709
  2306. BT.709
  2307. @item bt601
  2308. BT.601
  2309. @item smpte240m
  2310. SMPTE-240M
  2311. @item fcc
  2312. FCC
  2313. @end table
  2314. @end table
  2315. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2316. @example
  2317. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2318. @end example
  2319. @section copy
  2320. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
  2321. testing purposes.
  2322. @section crop
  2323. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2324. It accepts the following parameters:
  2325. @table @option
  2326. @item w, out_w
  2327. The width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2328. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2329. configuration.
  2330. @item h, out_h
  2331. The height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2332. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2333. configuration.
  2334. @item x
  2335. The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
  2336. video. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2337. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2338. @item y
  2339. The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2340. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2341. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2342. @item keep_aspect
  2343. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2344. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2345. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2346. @end table
  2347. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2348. expressions containing the following constants:
  2349. @table @option
  2350. @item x
  2351. @item y
  2352. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2353. each new frame.
  2354. @item in_w
  2355. @item in_h
  2356. The input width and height.
  2357. @item iw
  2358. @item ih
  2359. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  2360. @item out_w
  2361. @item out_h
  2362. The output (cropped) width and height.
  2363. @item ow
  2364. @item oh
  2365. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2366. @item a
  2367. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2368. @item sar
  2369. input sample aspect ratio
  2370. @item dar
  2371. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2372. @item hsub
  2373. @item vsub
  2374. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2375. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2376. @item n
  2377. The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  2378. @item pos
  2379. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2380. @item t
  2381. The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  2382. @end table
  2383. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2384. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2385. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2386. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2387. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2388. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2389. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2390. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2391. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2392. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2393. @subsection Examples
  2394. @itemize
  2395. @item
  2396. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2397. @example
  2398. crop=100:100:12:34
  2399. @end example
  2400. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2401. @example
  2402. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2403. @end example
  2404. @item
  2405. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2406. @example
  2407. crop=100:100
  2408. @end example
  2409. @item
  2410. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2411. @example
  2412. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2413. @end example
  2414. @item
  2415. Crop the input video central square:
  2416. @example
  2417. crop=out_w=in_h
  2418. crop=in_h
  2419. @end example
  2420. @item
  2421. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2422. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2423. corner of the input image.
  2424. @example
  2425. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2426. @end example
  2427. @item
  2428. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2429. the top and bottom borders
  2430. @example
  2431. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2432. @end example
  2433. @item
  2434. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2435. @example
  2436. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2437. @end example
  2438. @item
  2439. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2440. @example
  2441. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2442. @end example
  2443. @item
  2444. Appply trembling effect:
  2445. @example
  2446. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2447. @end example
  2448. @item
  2449. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2450. @example
  2451. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2452. @end example
  2453. @item
  2454. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2455. @example
  2456. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2457. @end example
  2458. @end itemize
  2459. @section cropdetect
  2460. Auto-detect the crop size.
  2461. It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
  2462. recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2463. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2464. It accepts the following parameters:
  2465. @table @option
  2466. @item limit
  2467. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2468. from nothing (0) to everything (255). An intensity value greater
  2469. to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
  2470. @item round
  2471. The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
  2472. 16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
  2473. get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2474. encoding to most video codecs.
  2475. @item reset_count, reset
  2476. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2477. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2478. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2479. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2480. indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
  2481. playback.
  2482. @end table
  2483. @anchor{curves}
  2484. @section curves
  2485. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2486. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2487. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2488. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2489. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2490. the output frame.
  2491. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2492. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2493. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2494. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2495. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2496. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2497. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2498. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2499. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2500. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2501. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2502. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2503. The filter accepts the following options:
  2504. @table @option
  2505. @item preset
  2506. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2507. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2508. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2509. Available presets are:
  2510. @table @samp
  2511. @item none
  2512. @item color_negative
  2513. @item cross_process
  2514. @item darker
  2515. @item increase_contrast
  2516. @item lighter
  2517. @item linear_contrast
  2518. @item medium_contrast
  2519. @item negative
  2520. @item strong_contrast
  2521. @item vintage
  2522. @end table
  2523. Default is @code{none}.
  2524. @item master, m
  2525. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2526. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2527. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2528. post-processing LUT.
  2529. @item red, r
  2530. Set the key points for the red component.
  2531. @item green, g
  2532. Set the key points for the green component.
  2533. @item blue, b
  2534. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2535. @item all
  2536. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2537. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2538. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2539. @option{all} setting.
  2540. @item psfile
  2541. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2542. @end table
  2543. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2544. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2545. @subsection Examples
  2546. @itemize
  2547. @item
  2548. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2549. @example
  2550. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2551. @end example
  2552. @item
  2553. Vintage effect:
  2554. @example
  2555. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2556. @end example
  2557. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2558. @table @var
  2559. @item red
  2560. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2561. @item green
  2562. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2563. @item blue
  2564. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2565. @end table
  2566. @item
  2567. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2568. @example
  2569. curves=preset=vintage
  2570. @end example
  2571. @item
  2572. Or simply:
  2573. @example
  2574. curves=vintage
  2575. @end example
  2576. @item
  2577. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2578. @example
  2579. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2580. @end example
  2581. @end itemize
  2582. @section dctdnoiz
  2583. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2584. This filter is not designed for real time.
  2585. The filter accepts the following options:
  2586. @table @option
  2587. @item sigma, s
  2588. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2589. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2590. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2591. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2592. Default is @code{0}.
  2593. @item overlap
  2594. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
  2595. may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
  2596. risk of various artefacts.
  2597. If the overlapping value doesn't allow to process the whole input width or
  2598. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2599. Default value is @var{blocksize}-1, which is the best possible setting.
  2600. @item expr, e
  2601. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2602. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2603. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2604. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2605. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2606. variable.
  2607. @item n
  2608. Set the @var{blocksize} using the number of bits. @code{1<<@var{n}} defines the
  2609. @var{blocksize}, which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
  2610. The default value is @var{3} (8x8) and can be raised to @var{4} for a
  2611. @var{blocksize} of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
  2612. on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
  2613. better de-noising.
  2614. @end table
  2615. @subsection Examples
  2616. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2617. @example
  2618. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2619. @end example
  2620. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2621. @example
  2622. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2623. @end example
  2624. Violent denoise using a block size of @code{16x16}:
  2625. @example
  2626. dctdnoiz=15:n=4
  2627. @end example
  2628. @anchor{decimate}
  2629. @section decimate
  2630. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2631. The filter accepts the following options:
  2632. @table @option
  2633. @item cycle
  2634. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2635. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2636. Default is @code{5}.
  2637. @item dupthresh
  2638. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2639. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2640. is @code{1.1}
  2641. @item scthresh
  2642. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2643. @item blockx
  2644. @item blocky
  2645. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2646. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2647. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2648. @item ppsrc
  2649. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2650. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2651. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2652. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2653. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2654. @code{0}.
  2655. @item chroma
  2656. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2657. @code{1}.
  2658. @end table
  2659. @section dejudder
  2660. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2661. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2662. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2663. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2664. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2665. rate video.
  2666. The option available in this filter is:
  2667. @table @option
  2668. @item cycle
  2669. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2670. Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2671. @table @samp
  2672. @item 4
  2673. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2674. @item 5
  2675. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2676. @item 20
  2677. If a mixture of the two.
  2678. @end table
  2679. The default is @samp{4}.
  2680. @end table
  2681. @section delogo
  2682. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2683. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2684. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2685. It accepts the following parameters:
  2686. @table @option
  2687. @item x
  2688. @item y
  2689. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2690. specified.
  2691. @item w
  2692. @item h
  2693. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2694. specified.
  2695. @item band, t
  2696. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2697. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2698. @item show
  2699. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2700. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2701. The default value is 0.
  2702. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2703. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2704. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2705. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2706. @end table
  2707. @subsection Examples
  2708. @itemize
  2709. @item
  2710. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2711. and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
  2712. @example
  2713. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2714. @end example
  2715. @end itemize
  2716. @section deshake
  2717. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2718. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2719. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2720. The filter accepts the following options:
  2721. @table @option
  2722. @item x
  2723. @item y
  2724. @item w
  2725. @item h
  2726. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2727. vectors.
  2728. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2729. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2730. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2731. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2732. box.
  2733. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2734. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2735. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2736. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2737. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2738. Default - search the whole frame.
  2739. @item rx
  2740. @item ry
  2741. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2742. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2743. @item edge
  2744. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2745. frame. Available values are:
  2746. @table @samp
  2747. @item blank, 0
  2748. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2749. @item original, 1
  2750. Original image at blank locations
  2751. @item clamp, 2
  2752. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2753. @item mirror, 3
  2754. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2755. @end table
  2756. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2757. @item blocksize
  2758. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2759. default 8.
  2760. @item contrast
  2761. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2762. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2763. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2764. @item search
  2765. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2766. @table @samp
  2767. @item exhaustive, 0
  2768. Set exhaustive search
  2769. @item less, 1
  2770. Set less exhaustive search.
  2771. @end table
  2772. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2773. @item filename
  2774. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2775. specified file.
  2776. @item opencl
  2777. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2778. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2779. @end table
  2780. @section drawbox
  2781. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2782. It accepts the following parameters:
  2783. @table @option
  2784. @item x
  2785. @item y
  2786. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
  2787. @item width, w
  2788. @item height, h
  2789. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
  2790. the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
  2791. @item color, c
  2792. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2793. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2794. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2795. video with inverted luma.
  2796. @item thickness, t
  2797. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2798. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2799. @end table
  2800. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2801. following constants:
  2802. @table @option
  2803. @item dar
  2804. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2805. @item hsub
  2806. @item vsub
  2807. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2808. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2809. @item in_h, ih
  2810. @item in_w, iw
  2811. The input width and height.
  2812. @item sar
  2813. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2814. @item x
  2815. @item y
  2816. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2817. @item w
  2818. @item h
  2819. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2820. @item t
  2821. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2822. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2823. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2824. @end table
  2825. @subsection Examples
  2826. @itemize
  2827. @item
  2828. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2829. @example
  2830. drawbox
  2831. @end example
  2832. @item
  2833. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2834. @example
  2835. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2836. @end example
  2837. The previous example can be specified as:
  2838. @example
  2839. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2840. @end example
  2841. @item
  2842. Fill the box with pink color:
  2843. @example
  2844. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2845. @end example
  2846. @item
  2847. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2848. @example
  2849. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2850. @end example
  2851. @end itemize
  2852. @section drawgrid
  2853. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2854. It accepts the following parameters:
  2855. @table @option
  2856. @item x
  2857. @item y
  2858. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2859. @item width, w
  2860. @item height, h
  2861. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2862. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2863. framed. Default to 0.
  2864. @item color, c
  2865. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2866. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2867. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2868. video with inverted luma.
  2869. @item thickness, t
  2870. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2871. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2872. @end table
  2873. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2874. following constants:
  2875. @table @option
  2876. @item dar
  2877. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2878. @item hsub
  2879. @item vsub
  2880. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2881. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2882. @item in_h, ih
  2883. @item in_w, iw
  2884. The input grid cell width and height.
  2885. @item sar
  2886. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2887. @item x
  2888. @item y
  2889. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  2890. @item w
  2891. @item h
  2892. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  2893. @item t
  2894. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  2895. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2896. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2897. @end table
  2898. @subsection Examples
  2899. @itemize
  2900. @item
  2901. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2902. @example
  2903. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  2904. @end example
  2905. @item
  2906. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  2907. @example
  2908. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  2909. @end example
  2910. @end itemize
  2911. @anchor{drawtext}
  2912. @section drawtext
  2913. Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
  2914. libfreetype library.
  2915. To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2916. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  2917. To enable default font fallback and the @var{font} option you need to
  2918. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libfontconfig}.
  2919. To enable the @var{text_shaping} option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2920. @code{--enable-libfribidi}.
  2921. @subsection Syntax
  2922. It accepts the following parameters:
  2923. @table @option
  2924. @item box
  2925. Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
  2926. The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  2927. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  2928. @item boxcolor
  2929. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  2930. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2931. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  2932. @item borderw
  2933. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  2934. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  2935. @item bordercolor
  2936. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  2937. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2938. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  2939. @item expansion
  2940. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  2941. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  2942. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  2943. below for details.
  2944. @item fix_bounds
  2945. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  2946. @item fontcolor
  2947. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  2948. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2949. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  2950. @item fontcolor_expr
  2951. String which is expanded the same way as @var{text} to obtain dynamic
  2952. @var{fontcolor} value. By default this option has empty value and is not
  2953. processed. When this option is set, it overrides @var{fontcolor} option.
  2954. @item font
  2955. The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
  2956. @item fontfile
  2957. The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
  2958. This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
  2959. @item fontsize
  2960. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  2961. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  2962. @item text_shaping
  2963. If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
  2964. right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
  2965. Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
  2966. By default 1 (if supported).
  2967. @item ft_load_flags
  2968. The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  2969. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  2970. a combination of the following values:
  2971. @table @var
  2972. @item default
  2973. @item no_scale
  2974. @item no_hinting
  2975. @item render
  2976. @item no_bitmap
  2977. @item vertical_layout
  2978. @item force_autohint
  2979. @item crop_bitmap
  2980. @item pedantic
  2981. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  2982. @item no_recurse
  2983. @item ignore_transform
  2984. @item monochrome
  2985. @item linear_design
  2986. @item no_autohint
  2987. @end table
  2988. Default value is "default".
  2989. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  2990. libfreetype flags.
  2991. @item shadowcolor
  2992. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  2993. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2994. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  2995. @item shadowx
  2996. @item shadowy
  2997. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  2998. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  2999. values. The default value for both is "0".
  3000. @item start_number
  3001. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  3002. is "0".
  3003. @item tabsize
  3004. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  3005. Default value is 4.
  3006. @item timecode
  3007. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  3008. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  3009. option must be specified.
  3010. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  3011. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  3012. @item text
  3013. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  3014. encoded characters.
  3015. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  3016. @var{textfile}.
  3017. @item textfile
  3018. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  3019. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  3020. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  3021. parameter @var{text}.
  3022. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  3023. @item reload
  3024. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  3025. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  3026. @item x
  3027. @item y
  3028. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  3029. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  3030. output image.
  3031. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  3032. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  3033. @end table
  3034. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  3035. following constants and functions:
  3036. @table @option
  3037. @item dar
  3038. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  3039. @item hsub
  3040. @item vsub
  3041. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  3042. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  3043. @item line_h, lh
  3044. the height of each text line
  3045. @item main_h, h, H
  3046. the input height
  3047. @item main_w, w, W
  3048. the input width
  3049. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  3050. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  3051. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  3052. glyphs.
  3053. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  3054. upwards.
  3055. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  3056. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  3057. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  3058. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  3059. upwards.
  3060. @item max_glyph_h
  3061. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  3062. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  3063. @var{descent}.
  3064. @item max_glyph_w
  3065. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  3066. contained in the rendered text
  3067. @item n
  3068. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  3069. @item rand(min, max)
  3070. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  3071. @item sar
  3072. The input sample aspect ratio.
  3073. @item t
  3074. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3075. @item text_h, th
  3076. the height of the rendered text
  3077. @item text_w, tw
  3078. the width of the rendered text
  3079. @item x
  3080. @item y
  3081. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  3082. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  3083. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  3084. @end table
  3085. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  3086. @subsection Text expansion
  3087. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  3088. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  3089. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  3090. feature is deprecated.
  3091. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  3092. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  3093. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  3094. The backslash character '\', followed by any character, always expands to
  3095. the second character.
  3096. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  3097. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  3098. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  3099. they should be escaped.
  3100. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  3101. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  3102. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  3103. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  3104. problems.
  3105. The following functions are available:
  3106. @table @command
  3107. @item expr, e
  3108. The expression evaluation result.
  3109. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  3110. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  3111. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  3112. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  3113. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  3114. value.
  3115. @item expr_int_format, eif
  3116. Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.
  3117. The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the @var{expr} function.
  3118. The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are 'x', 'X', 'd' and
  3119. 'u'. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
  3120. The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
  3121. It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
  3122. @item gmtime
  3123. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  3124. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3125. @item localtime
  3126. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  3127. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3128. @item metadata
  3129. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  3130. @item n, frame_num
  3131. The frame number, starting from 0.
  3132. @item pict_type
  3133. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  3134. @item pts
  3135. The timestamp of the current frame.
  3136. It can take up to two arguments.
  3137. The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to @code{flt}
  3138. for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; @code{hms} stands
  3139. for a formatted @var{[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm} timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
  3140. The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
  3141. @end table
  3142. @subsection Examples
  3143. @itemize
  3144. @item
  3145. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  3146. optional parameters.
  3147. @example
  3148. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  3149. @end example
  3150. @item
  3151. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  3152. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  3153. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  3154. opacity of 20%.
  3155. @example
  3156. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  3157. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  3158. @end example
  3159. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  3160. within the parameter list.
  3161. @item
  3162. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  3163. @example
  3164. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  3165. @end example
  3166. @item
  3167. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  3168. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  3169. with no newlines.
  3170. @example
  3171. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  3172. @end example
  3173. @item
  3174. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  3175. @example
  3176. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  3177. @end example
  3178. @item
  3179. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  3180. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  3181. @example
  3182. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  3183. @end example
  3184. @item
  3185. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  3186. @example
  3187. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  3188. @end example
  3189. @item
  3190. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  3191. @example
  3192. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  3193. @end example
  3194. @item
  3195. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  3196. @example
  3197. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  3198. @end example
  3199. @item
  3200. Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):
  3201. @example
  3202. #!/bin/sh
  3203. DS=1.0 # display start
  3204. DE=10.0 # display end
  3205. FID=1.5 # fade in duration
  3206. FOD=5 # fade out duration
  3207. ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%@{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 @}"
  3208. @end example
  3209. @end itemize
  3210. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  3211. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  3212. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  3213. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  3214. For more information about libfribidi, check:
  3215. @url{http://fribidi.org/}.
  3216. @section edgedetect
  3217. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  3218. The filter accepts the following options:
  3219. @table @option
  3220. @item low
  3221. @item high
  3222. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  3223. algorithm.
  3224. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  3225. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3226. by the low threshold.
  3227. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be chosen in the range
  3228. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3229. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3230. is @code{50/255}.
  3231. @item mode
  3232. Define the drawing mode.
  3233. @table @samp
  3234. @item wires
  3235. Draw white/gray wires on black background.
  3236. @item colormix
  3237. Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
  3238. @end table
  3239. Default value is @var{wires}.
  3240. @end table
  3241. @subsection Examples
  3242. @itemize
  3243. @item
  3244. Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
  3245. @example
  3246. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3247. @end example
  3248. @item
  3249. Painting effect without thresholding:
  3250. @example
  3251. edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
  3252. @end example
  3253. @end itemize
  3254. @section extractplanes
  3255. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3256. separate grayscale video streams.
  3257. The filter accepts the following option:
  3258. @table @option
  3259. @item planes
  3260. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3261. Available values for planes are:
  3262. @table @samp
  3263. @item y
  3264. @item u
  3265. @item v
  3266. @item a
  3267. @item r
  3268. @item g
  3269. @item b
  3270. @end table
  3271. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3272. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3273. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3274. @end table
  3275. @subsection Examples
  3276. @itemize
  3277. @item
  3278. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3279. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3280. @example
  3281. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3282. @end example
  3283. @end itemize
  3284. @section elbg
  3285. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3286. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3287. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3288. of distinct output colors.
  3289. This filter accepts the following options.
  3290. @table @option
  3291. @item codebook_length, l
  3292. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3293. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3294. @item nb_steps, n
  3295. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3296. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3297. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3298. @item seed, s
  3299. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3300. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3301. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3302. @end table
  3303. @section fade
  3304. Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
  3305. It accepts the following parameters:
  3306. @table @option
  3307. @item type, t
  3308. The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3309. effect.
  3310. Default is @code{in}.
  3311. @item start_frame, s
  3312. Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
  3313. effect at. Default is 0.
  3314. @item nb_frames, n
  3315. The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
  3316. fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
  3317. At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
  3318. selected @option{color}.
  3319. Default is 25.
  3320. @item alpha
  3321. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3322. Default value is 0.
  3323. @item start_time, st
  3324. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3325. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3326. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3327. @item duration, d
  3328. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3329. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3330. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3331. selected @option{color}.
  3332. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
  3333. @item color, c
  3334. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3335. @end table
  3336. @subsection Examples
  3337. @itemize
  3338. @item
  3339. Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
  3340. @example
  3341. fade=in:0:30
  3342. @end example
  3343. The command above is equivalent to:
  3344. @example
  3345. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3346. @end example
  3347. @item
  3348. Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3349. @example
  3350. fade=out:155:45
  3351. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3352. @end example
  3353. @item
  3354. Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3355. @example
  3356. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3357. @end example
  3358. @item
  3359. Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3360. @example
  3361. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3362. @end example
  3363. @item
  3364. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3365. @example
  3366. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3367. @end example
  3368. @item
  3369. Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3370. @example
  3371. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3372. @end example
  3373. @end itemize
  3374. @section field
  3375. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3376. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3377. non-interlaced.
  3378. The filter accepts the following options:
  3379. @table @option
  3380. @item type
  3381. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3382. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3383. @code{bottom}).
  3384. @end table
  3385. @section fieldmatch
  3386. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3387. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3388. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3389. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3390. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3391. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3392. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3393. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3394. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3395. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3396. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3397. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3398. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3399. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3400. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3401. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3402. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3403. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3404. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3405. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3406. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3407. The filter accepts the following options:
  3408. @table @option
  3409. @item order
  3410. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3411. @table @samp
  3412. @item auto
  3413. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3414. @item bff
  3415. Assume bottom field first.
  3416. @item tff
  3417. Assume top field first.
  3418. @end table
  3419. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3420. stream.
  3421. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3422. @item mode
  3423. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3424. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3425. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3426. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3427. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3428. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3429. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3430. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3431. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3432. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3433. Available values are:
  3434. @table @samp
  3435. @item pc
  3436. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3437. @item pc_n
  3438. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3439. @item pc_u
  3440. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3441. @item pc_n_ub
  3442. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3443. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3444. @item pcn
  3445. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3446. @item pcn_ub
  3447. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3448. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3449. @end table
  3450. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3451. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3452. @var{top}).
  3453. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3454. the slowest.
  3455. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3456. @item ppsrc
  3457. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3458. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3459. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3460. VFM/TFM.
  3461. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3462. @item field
  3463. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3464. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3465. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3466. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3467. @table @samp
  3468. @item auto
  3469. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3470. @item bottom
  3471. Match from the bottom field.
  3472. @item top
  3473. Match from the top field.
  3474. @end table
  3475. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3476. @item mchroma
  3477. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3478. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3479. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3480. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3481. the cost of some accuracy.
  3482. Default value is @code{1}.
  3483. @item y0
  3484. @item y1
  3485. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3486. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3487. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3488. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3489. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3490. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3491. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3492. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3493. @item scthresh
  3494. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3495. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3496. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3497. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3498. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3499. @item combmatch
  3500. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3501. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3502. final match. Available values are:
  3503. @table @samp
  3504. @item none
  3505. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3506. @item sc
  3507. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3508. @item full
  3509. Use combed scores all the time.
  3510. @end table
  3511. Default is @var{sc}.
  3512. @item combdbg
  3513. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3514. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3515. Available values are:
  3516. @table @samp
  3517. @item none
  3518. No forced calculation.
  3519. @item pcn
  3520. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3521. @item pcnub
  3522. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3523. @end table
  3524. Default value is @var{none}.
  3525. @item cthresh
  3526. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3527. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3528. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3529. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3530. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3531. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3532. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3533. Default value is @code{9}.
  3534. @item chroma
  3535. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3536. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3537. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3538. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3539. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3540. Default value is @code{0}.
  3541. @item blockx
  3542. @item blocky
  3543. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3544. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3545. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3546. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3547. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3548. to 512.
  3549. Default value is @code{16}.
  3550. @item combpel
  3551. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3552. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3553. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3554. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3555. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3556. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3557. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3558. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3559. Default value is @code{80}.
  3560. @end table
  3561. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3562. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3563. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3564. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3565. @example
  3566. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3567. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3568. @end example
  3569. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3570. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3571. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3572. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3573. @example
  3574. Input stream:
  3575. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3576. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3577. Matches: c c n n c
  3578. Output stream:
  3579. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3580. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3581. @end example
  3582. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3583. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3584. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3585. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3586. looks like this:
  3587. @example
  3588. Input stream:
  3589. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3590. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3591. Matches: c c p p c
  3592. Output stream:
  3593. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3594. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3595. @end example
  3596. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3597. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3598. @itemize
  3599. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3600. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3601. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3602. @end itemize
  3603. @subsubsection u/b
  3604. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3605. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3606. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3607. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3608. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3609. @example
  3610. Match: c p n b u
  3611. x x x x x
  3612. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3613. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3614. x x x x x
  3615. Output frames:
  3616. 2 1 2 2 2
  3617. 2 2 2 1 3
  3618. @end example
  3619. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3620. @example
  3621. Match: c p n b u
  3622. x x x x x
  3623. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3624. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3625. x x x x x
  3626. Output frames:
  3627. 2 2 2 1 2
  3628. 2 1 3 2 2
  3629. @end example
  3630. @subsection Examples
  3631. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3632. @example
  3633. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3634. @end example
  3635. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3636. @example
  3637. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3638. @end example
  3639. @section fieldorder
  3640. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3641. It accepts the following parameters:
  3642. @table @option
  3643. @item order
  3644. The output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3645. for bottom field first.
  3646. @end table
  3647. The default value is @samp{tff}.
  3648. The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
  3649. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3650. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3651. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3652. flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
  3653. not alter the incoming video.
  3654. It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3655. which is bottom field first.
  3656. For example:
  3657. @example
  3658. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3659. @end example
  3660. @section fifo
  3661. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3662. It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3663. framework.
  3664. It does not take parameters.
  3665. @anchor{format}
  3666. @section format
  3667. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3668. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
  3669. the next filter.
  3670. It accepts the following parameters:
  3671. @table @option
  3672. @item pix_fmts
  3673. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  3674. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3675. @end table
  3676. @subsection Examples
  3677. @itemize
  3678. @item
  3679. Convert the input video to the @var{yuv420p} format
  3680. @example
  3681. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3682. @end example
  3683. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3684. @example
  3685. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3686. @end example
  3687. @end itemize
  3688. @anchor{fps}
  3689. @section fps
  3690. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3691. frames as necessary.
  3692. It accepts the following parameters:
  3693. @table @option
  3694. @item fps
  3695. The desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3696. @item round
  3697. Rounding method.
  3698. Possible values are:
  3699. @table @option
  3700. @item zero
  3701. zero round towards 0
  3702. @item inf
  3703. round away from 0
  3704. @item down
  3705. round towards -infinity
  3706. @item up
  3707. round towards +infinity
  3708. @item near
  3709. round to nearest
  3710. @end table
  3711. The default is @code{near}.
  3712. @item start_time
  3713. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3714. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3715. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3716. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3717. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3718. frames with a negative PTS.
  3719. @end table
  3720. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3721. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3722. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3723. @subsection Examples
  3724. @itemize
  3725. @item
  3726. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3727. @example
  3728. fps=fps=25
  3729. @end example
  3730. @item
  3731. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3732. @example
  3733. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3734. @end example
  3735. @end itemize
  3736. @section framepack
  3737. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3738. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3739. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3740. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3741. @ref{fps} filters.
  3742. It accepts the following parameters:
  3743. @table @option
  3744. @item format
  3745. The desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3746. @table @option
  3747. @item sbs
  3748. The views are next to each other (default).
  3749. @item tab
  3750. The views are on top of each other.
  3751. @item lines
  3752. The views are packed by line.
  3753. @item columns
  3754. The views are packed by column.
  3755. @item frameseq
  3756. The views are temporally interleaved.
  3757. @end table
  3758. @end table
  3759. Some examples:
  3760. @example
  3761. # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
  3762. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  3763. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
  3764. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  3765. @end example
  3766. @section framestep
  3767. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  3768. This filter accepts the following option:
  3769. @table @option
  3770. @item step
  3771. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  3772. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  3773. @end table
  3774. @anchor{frei0r}
  3775. @section frei0r
  3776. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  3777. To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
  3778. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  3779. It accepts the following parameters:
  3780. @table @option
  3781. @item filter_name
  3782. The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  3783. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
  3784. directories specified by the colon-separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH}.
  3785. Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
  3786. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  3787. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  3788. @item filter_params
  3789. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  3790. @end table
  3791. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
  3792. "y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
  3793. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, where @var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} are floating point
  3794. numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  3795. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as @var{X}/@var{Y}, where
  3796. @var{X} and @var{Y} are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
  3797. The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  3798. effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
  3799. @subsection Examples
  3800. @itemize
  3801. @item
  3802. Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
  3803. @example
  3804. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  3805. @end example
  3806. @item
  3807. Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
  3808. @example
  3809. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  3810. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  3811. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  3812. @end example
  3813. @item
  3814. Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
  3815. positions:
  3816. @example
  3817. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  3818. @end example
  3819. @end itemize
  3820. For more information, see
  3821. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  3822. @section geq
  3823. The filter accepts the following options:
  3824. @table @option
  3825. @item lum_expr, lum
  3826. Set the luminance expression.
  3827. @item cb_expr, cb
  3828. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  3829. @item cr_expr, cr
  3830. Set the chrominance red expression.
  3831. @item alpha_expr, a
  3832. Set the alpha expression.
  3833. @item red_expr, r
  3834. Set the red expression.
  3835. @item green_expr, g
  3836. Set the green expression.
  3837. @item blue_expr, b
  3838. Set the blue expression.
  3839. @end table
  3840. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  3841. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  3842. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  3843. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  3844. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  3845. colorspace.
  3846. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  3847. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  3848. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  3849. to the luminance expression.
  3850. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  3851. @table @option
  3852. @item N
  3853. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  3854. @item X
  3855. @item Y
  3856. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3857. @item W
  3858. @item H
  3859. The width and height of the image.
  3860. @item SW
  3861. @item SH
  3862. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  3863. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  3864. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  3865. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  3866. @item T
  3867. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  3868. @item p(x, y)
  3869. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  3870. plane.
  3871. @item lum(x, y)
  3872. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  3873. plane.
  3874. @item cb(x, y)
  3875. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3876. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3877. @item cr(x, y)
  3878. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3879. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3880. @item r(x, y)
  3881. @item g(x, y)
  3882. @item b(x, y)
  3883. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3884. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  3885. @item alpha(x, y)
  3886. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  3887. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3888. @end table
  3889. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  3890. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  3891. @subsection Examples
  3892. @itemize
  3893. @item
  3894. Flip the image horizontally:
  3895. @example
  3896. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  3897. @end example
  3898. @item
  3899. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  3900. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  3901. @example
  3902. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  3903. @end example
  3904. @item
  3905. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  3906. @example
  3907. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  3908. @end example
  3909. @item
  3910. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  3911. @example
  3912. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  3913. @end example
  3914. @item
  3915. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  3916. @example
  3917. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  3918. @end example
  3919. @item
  3920. Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
  3921. the @ref{vignette} filter):
  3922. @example
  3923. geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
  3924. @end example
  3925. @item
  3926. Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
  3927. compose with @ref{overlay}. In this example the video will gradually
  3928. become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
  3929. by the linear gradient:
  3930. @example
  3931. ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
  3932. @end example
  3933. @end itemize
  3934. @section gradfun
  3935. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  3936. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  3937. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  3938. dither them.
  3939. It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  3940. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  3941. bring back the bands.
  3942. It accepts the following parameters:
  3943. @table @option
  3944. @item strength
  3945. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
  3946. the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
  3947. .51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
  3948. valid range.
  3949. @item radius
  3950. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  3951. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  3952. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
  3953. values will be clipped to the valid range.
  3954. @end table
  3955. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3956. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  3957. @subsection Examples
  3958. @itemize
  3959. @item
  3960. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  3961. @example
  3962. gradfun=3.5:8
  3963. @end example
  3964. @item
  3965. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  3966. value):
  3967. @example
  3968. gradfun=radius=8
  3969. @end example
  3970. @end itemize
  3971. @anchor{haldclut}
  3972. @section haldclut
  3973. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  3974. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  3975. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  3976. The filter accepts the following options:
  3977. @table @option
  3978. @item shortest
  3979. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  3980. @item repeatlast
  3981. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  3982. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  3983. Default is @code{1}.
  3984. @end table
  3985. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  3986. filters share the same internals).
  3987. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  3988. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  3989. @subsection Workflow examples
  3990. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  3991. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  3992. @example
  3993. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  3994. @end example
  3995. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  3996. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  3997. @example
  3998. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  3999. @end example
  4000. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  4001. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  4002. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  4003. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  4004. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  4005. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  4006. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  4007. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  4008. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  4009. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  4010. @code{haldclut} filter:
  4011. @example
  4012. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  4013. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  4014. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  4015. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  4016. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  4017. @end example
  4018. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  4019. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  4020. the color changes.
  4021. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  4022. @example
  4023. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  4024. @end example
  4025. @section hflip
  4026. Flip the input video horizontally.
  4027. For example, to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  4028. @example
  4029. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  4030. @end example
  4031. @section histeq
  4032. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  4033. per-frame basis.
  4034. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  4035. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  4036. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  4037. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  4038. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  4039. video.
  4040. The filter accepts the following options:
  4041. @table @option
  4042. @item strength
  4043. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  4044. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  4045. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  4046. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  4047. @item intensity
  4048. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  4049. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  4050. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  4051. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  4052. @item antibanding
  4053. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  4054. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  4055. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  4056. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  4057. @end table
  4058. @section histogram
  4059. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  4060. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  4061. distribution in an image.
  4062. The filter accepts the following options:
  4063. @table @option
  4064. @item mode
  4065. Set histogram mode.
  4066. It accepts the following values:
  4067. @table @samp
  4068. @item levels
  4069. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  4070. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  4071. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  4072. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  4073. @item color
  4074. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  4075. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  4076. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  4077. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  4078. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  4079. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  4080. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  4081. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  4082. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  4083. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  4084. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  4085. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  4086. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  4087. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  4088. the edge of the square.
  4089. @item color2
  4090. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  4091. are displayed.
  4092. @item waveform
  4093. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  4094. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  4095. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  4096. side represents value = 255.
  4097. @end table
  4098. Default value is @code{levels}.
  4099. @item level_height
  4100. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  4101. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  4102. @item scale_height
  4103. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  4104. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  4105. @item step
  4106. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  4107. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  4108. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  4109. @item waveform_mode
  4110. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  4111. Default is @code{row}.
  4112. @item waveform_mirror
  4113. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  4114. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  4115. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  4116. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  4117. @item display_mode
  4118. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  4119. It accepts the following values:
  4120. @table @samp
  4121. @item parade
  4122. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  4123. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  4124. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  4125. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  4126. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  4127. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  4128. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  4129. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  4130. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  4131. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  4132. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  4133. @item overlay
  4134. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  4135. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  4136. over one another.
  4137. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  4138. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  4139. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  4140. or blacks.
  4141. @end table
  4142. Default is @code{parade}.
  4143. @item levels_mode
  4144. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  4145. Default is @code{linear}.
  4146. @end table
  4147. @subsection Examples
  4148. @itemize
  4149. @item
  4150. Calculate and draw histogram:
  4151. @example
  4152. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  4153. @end example
  4154. @end itemize
  4155. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  4156. @section hqdn3d
  4157. This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
  4158. image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
  4159. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  4160. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4161. @table @option
  4162. @item luma_spatial
  4163. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
  4164. It defaults to 4.0.
  4165. @item chroma_spatial
  4166. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
  4167. It defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4168. @item luma_tmp
  4169. A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4170. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4171. @item chroma_tmp
  4172. A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4173. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}.
  4174. @end table
  4175. @section hqx
  4176. Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
  4177. was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
  4178. It accepts the following option:
  4179. @table @option
  4180. @item n
  4181. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{hq2x}, @code{3} for
  4182. @code{hq3x} and @code{4} for @code{hq4x}.
  4183. Default is @code{3}.
  4184. @end table
  4185. @section hue
  4186. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  4187. It accepts the following parameters:
  4188. @table @option
  4189. @item h
  4190. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  4191. and defaults to "0".
  4192. @item s
  4193. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4194. defaults to "1".
  4195. @item H
  4196. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  4197. expression, and defaults to "0".
  4198. @item b
  4199. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4200. defaults to "0".
  4201. @end table
  4202. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  4203. specified at the same time.
  4204. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  4205. expressions containing the following constants:
  4206. @table @option
  4207. @item n
  4208. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  4209. @item pts
  4210. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  4211. @item r
  4212. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  4213. @item t
  4214. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4215. @item tb
  4216. time base of the input video
  4217. @end table
  4218. @subsection Examples
  4219. @itemize
  4220. @item
  4221. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  4222. @example
  4223. hue=h=90:s=1
  4224. @end example
  4225. @item
  4226. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  4227. @example
  4228. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  4229. @end example
  4230. @item
  4231. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  4232. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  4233. @example
  4234. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  4235. @end example
  4236. @item
  4237. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  4238. @example
  4239. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  4240. @end example
  4241. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  4242. @example
  4243. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  4244. @end example
  4245. @item
  4246. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  4247. @example
  4248. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  4249. @end example
  4250. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  4251. @example
  4252. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  4253. @end example
  4254. @end itemize
  4255. @subsection Commands
  4256. This filter supports the following commands:
  4257. @table @option
  4258. @item b
  4259. @item s
  4260. @item h
  4261. @item H
  4262. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  4263. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4264. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4265. value.
  4266. @end table
  4267. @section idet
  4268. Detect video interlacing type.
  4269. This filter tries to detect if the input is interlaced or progressive,
  4270. top or bottom field first.
  4271. The filter accepts the following options:
  4272. @table @option
  4273. @item intl_thres
  4274. Set interlacing threshold.
  4275. @item prog_thres
  4276. Set progressive threshold.
  4277. @end table
  4278. @section il
  4279. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4280. This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
  4281. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4282. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4283. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4284. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4285. The filter accepts the following options:
  4286. @table @option
  4287. @item luma_mode, l
  4288. @item chroma_mode, c
  4289. @item alpha_mode, a
  4290. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4291. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4292. @table @samp
  4293. @item none
  4294. Do nothing.
  4295. @item deinterleave, d
  4296. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4297. @item interleave, i
  4298. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4299. @end table
  4300. Default value is @code{none}.
  4301. @item luma_swap, ls
  4302. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4303. @item alpha_swap, as
  4304. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4305. @end table
  4306. @section interlace
  4307. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4308. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4309. halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
  4310. @example
  4311. Original Original New Frame
  4312. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4313. ========== =========== ==================
  4314. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4315. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4316. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4317. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4318. ... ... ...
  4319. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4320. @end example
  4321. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4322. @table @option
  4323. @item scan
  4324. This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
  4325. (tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4326. @item lowpass
  4327. Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
  4328. interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
  4329. @end table
  4330. @section kerndeint
  4331. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4332. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4333. progressive frames.
  4334. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4335. @table @option
  4336. @item thresh
  4337. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4338. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4339. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4340. applying the process on every pixels.
  4341. @item map
  4342. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4343. Default is 0.
  4344. @item order
  4345. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4346. 0. Default is 0.
  4347. @item sharp
  4348. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4349. @item twoway
  4350. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4351. @end table
  4352. @subsection Examples
  4353. @itemize
  4354. @item
  4355. Apply default values:
  4356. @example
  4357. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4358. @end example
  4359. @item
  4360. Enable additional sharpening:
  4361. @example
  4362. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4363. @end example
  4364. @item
  4365. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4366. @example
  4367. kerndeint=map=1
  4368. @end example
  4369. @end itemize
  4370. @section lenscorrection
  4371. Correct radial lens distortion
  4372. This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
  4373. of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
  4374. one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
  4375. To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
  4376. and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
  4377. Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
  4378. Digikam from the KDE project.
  4379. In contrast to the @ref{vignette} filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
  4380. this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas @ref{vignette} corrects the
  4381. brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
  4382. cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
  4383. be applied before or after lens correction.
  4384. @subsection Options
  4385. The filter accepts the following options:
  4386. @table @option
  4387. @item cx
  4388. Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4389. distrortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4390. width.
  4391. @item cy
  4392. Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4393. distrortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4394. height.
  4395. @item k1
  4396. Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4397. @item k2
  4398. Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4399. @end table
  4400. The formula that generates the correction is:
  4401. @var{r_src} = @var{r_tgt} * (1 + @var{k1} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^2 + @var{k2} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^4)
  4402. where @var{r_0} is halve of the image diagonal and @var{r_src} and @var{r_tgt} are the
  4403. distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
  4404. @anchor{lut3d}
  4405. @section lut3d
  4406. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4407. The filter accepts the following options:
  4408. @table @option
  4409. @item file
  4410. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4411. Currently supported formats:
  4412. @table @samp
  4413. @item 3dl
  4414. AfterEffects
  4415. @item cube
  4416. Iridas
  4417. @item dat
  4418. DaVinci
  4419. @item m3d
  4420. Pandora
  4421. @end table
  4422. @item interp
  4423. Select interpolation mode.
  4424. Available values are:
  4425. @table @samp
  4426. @item nearest
  4427. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4428. @item trilinear
  4429. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4430. @item tetrahedral
  4431. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4432. @end table
  4433. @end table
  4434. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4435. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4436. to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
  4437. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4438. to an RGB input video.
  4439. These filters accept the following parameters:
  4440. @table @option
  4441. @item c0
  4442. set first pixel component expression
  4443. @item c1
  4444. set second pixel component expression
  4445. @item c2
  4446. set third pixel component expression
  4447. @item c3
  4448. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4449. @item r
  4450. set red component expression
  4451. @item g
  4452. set green component expression
  4453. @item b
  4454. set blue component expression
  4455. @item a
  4456. alpha component expression
  4457. @item y
  4458. set Y/luminance component expression
  4459. @item u
  4460. set U/Cb component expression
  4461. @item v
  4462. set V/Cr component expression
  4463. @end table
  4464. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4465. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4466. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4467. format in input.
  4468. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4469. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4470. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4471. @table @option
  4472. @item w
  4473. @item h
  4474. The input width and height.
  4475. @item val
  4476. The input value for the pixel component.
  4477. @item clipval
  4478. The input value, clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4479. @item maxval
  4480. The maximum value for the pixel component.
  4481. @item minval
  4482. The minimum value for the pixel component.
  4483. @item negval
  4484. The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
  4485. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range; it corresponds to the expression
  4486. "maxval-clipval+minval".
  4487. @item clip(val)
  4488. The computed value in @var{val}, clipped to the
  4489. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4490. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4491. The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
  4492. clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range. It corresponds to the
  4493. expression
  4494. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4495. @end table
  4496. All expressions default to "val".
  4497. @subsection Examples
  4498. @itemize
  4499. @item
  4500. Negate input video:
  4501. @example
  4502. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4503. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4504. @end example
  4505. The above is the same as:
  4506. @example
  4507. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4508. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4509. @end example
  4510. @item
  4511. Negate luminance:
  4512. @example
  4513. lutyuv=y=negval
  4514. @end example
  4515. @item
  4516. Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
  4517. @example
  4518. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4519. @end example
  4520. @item
  4521. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4522. @example
  4523. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4524. @end example
  4525. @item
  4526. Remove green and blue components:
  4527. @example
  4528. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4529. @end example
  4530. @item
  4531. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4532. @example
  4533. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4534. @end example
  4535. @item
  4536. Correct luminance gamma by a factor of 0.5:
  4537. @example
  4538. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4539. @end example
  4540. @item
  4541. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4542. @example
  4543. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4544. @end example
  4545. @end itemize
  4546. @section mergeplanes
  4547. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4548. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4549. planes to the output video.
  4550. This filter accepts the following options:
  4551. @table @option
  4552. @item mapping
  4553. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4554. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4555. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4556. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4557. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4558. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4559. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4560. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4561. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4562. @item format
  4563. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4564. @end table
  4565. @subsection Examples
  4566. @itemize
  4567. @item
  4568. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4569. @example
  4570. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4571. @end example
  4572. @item
  4573. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4574. @example
  4575. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4576. @end example
  4577. @item
  4578. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4579. @example
  4580. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4581. @end example
  4582. @item
  4583. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4584. @example
  4585. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4586. @end example
  4587. @item
  4588. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4589. @example
  4590. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4591. @end example
  4592. @end itemize
  4593. @section mcdeint
  4594. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4595. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4596. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4597. This filter accepts the following options:
  4598. @table @option
  4599. @item mode
  4600. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4601. It accepts one of the following values:
  4602. @table @samp
  4603. @item fast
  4604. @item medium
  4605. @item slow
  4606. use iterative motion estimation
  4607. @item extra_slow
  4608. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4609. @end table
  4610. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4611. @item parity
  4612. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4613. one of the following values:
  4614. @table @samp
  4615. @item 0, tff
  4616. assume top field first
  4617. @item 1, bff
  4618. assume bottom field first
  4619. @end table
  4620. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4621. @item qp
  4622. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4623. encoder.
  4624. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4625. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4626. @end table
  4627. @section mp
  4628. Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
  4629. This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
  4630. MPlayer/MEncoder.
  4631. This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
  4632. may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
  4633. be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
  4634. depending on them when writing portable scripts.
  4635. The filter accepts the parameters:
  4636. @var{filter_name}[:=]@var{filter_params}
  4637. @var{filter_name} is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
  4638. @var{filter_params} is a string containing the parameters accepted by
  4639. the named filter.
  4640. The list of the currently supported filters follows:
  4641. @table @var
  4642. @item eq2
  4643. @item eq
  4644. @item fspp
  4645. @item ilpack
  4646. @item pp7
  4647. @item softpulldown
  4648. @item uspp
  4649. @end table
  4650. The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
  4651. of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
  4652. the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
  4653. @subsection Examples
  4654. @itemize
  4655. @item
  4656. Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
  4657. @example
  4658. mp=eq2=1.0:2:0.5
  4659. @end example
  4660. @end itemize
  4661. See also mplayer(1), @url{http://www.mplayerhq.hu/}.
  4662. @section mpdecimate
  4663. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4664. order to reduce frame rate.
  4665. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4666. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4667. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4668. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4669. @table @option
  4670. @item max
  4671. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4672. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4673. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4674. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4675. Default value is 0.
  4676. @item hi
  4677. @item lo
  4678. @item frac
  4679. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4680. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4681. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4682. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4683. out differently over the block.
  4684. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4685. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4686. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4687. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4688. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4689. @end table
  4690. @section negate
  4691. Negate input video.
  4692. It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
  4693. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4694. @section noformat
  4695. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4696. input to the next filter.
  4697. It accepts the following parameters:
  4698. @table @option
  4699. @item pix_fmts
  4700. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  4701. apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4702. @end table
  4703. @subsection Examples
  4704. @itemize
  4705. @item
  4706. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4707. input to the vflip filter:
  4708. @example
  4709. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4710. @end example
  4711. @item
  4712. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4713. @example
  4714. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4715. @end example
  4716. @end itemize
  4717. @section noise
  4718. Add noise on video input frame.
  4719. The filter accepts the following options:
  4720. @table @option
  4721. @item all_seed
  4722. @item c0_seed
  4723. @item c1_seed
  4724. @item c2_seed
  4725. @item c3_seed
  4726. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4727. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  4728. @item all_strength, alls
  4729. @item c0_strength, c0s
  4730. @item c1_strength, c1s
  4731. @item c2_strength, c2s
  4732. @item c3_strength, c3s
  4733. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4734. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  4735. @item all_flags, allf
  4736. @item c0_flags, c0f
  4737. @item c1_flags, c1f
  4738. @item c2_flags, c2f
  4739. @item c3_flags, c3f
  4740. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  4741. Available values for component flags are:
  4742. @table @samp
  4743. @item a
  4744. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  4745. @item p
  4746. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  4747. @item t
  4748. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  4749. @item u
  4750. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  4751. @end table
  4752. @end table
  4753. @subsection Examples
  4754. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  4755. @example
  4756. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  4757. @end example
  4758. @section null
  4759. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  4760. @section ocv
  4761. Apply a video transform using libopencv.
  4762. To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
  4763. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  4764. It accepts the following parameters:
  4765. @table @option
  4766. @item filter_name
  4767. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  4768. @item filter_params
  4769. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
  4770. values are assumed.
  4771. @end table
  4772. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  4773. information:
  4774. @url{http://opencv.willowgarage.com/documentation/c/image_filtering.html}
  4775. Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
  4776. @anchor{dilate}
  4777. @subsection dilate
  4778. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4779. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  4780. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  4781. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  4782. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  4783. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  4784. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  4785. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element. @var{shape}
  4786. must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
  4787. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  4788. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  4789. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  4790. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  4791. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  4792. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  4793. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  4794. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  4795. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  4796. Some examples:
  4797. @example
  4798. # Use the default values
  4799. ocv=dilate
  4800. # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
  4801. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  4802. # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
  4803. # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
  4804. # *
  4805. # ***
  4806. # *****
  4807. # ***
  4808. # *
  4809. # The specified columns and rows are ignored
  4810. # but the anchor point coordinates are not
  4811. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  4812. @end example
  4813. @subsection erode
  4814. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4815. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  4816. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  4817. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  4818. @subsection smooth
  4819. Smooth the input video.
  4820. The filter takes the following parameters:
  4821. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  4822. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
  4823. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  4824. or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  4825. The meaning of @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4}
  4826. depend on the smooth type. @var{param1} and
  4827. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0. @var{param3} and
  4828. @var{param4} accept floating point values.
  4829. The default value for @var{param1} is 3. The default value for the
  4830. other parameters is 0.
  4831. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  4832. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  4833. @anchor{overlay}
  4834. @section overlay
  4835. Overlay one video on top of another.
  4836. It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
  4837. video on which the second input is overlayed.
  4838. It accepts the following parameters:
  4839. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4840. @table @option
  4841. @item x
  4842. @item y
  4843. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlayed video
  4844. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  4845. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  4846. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  4847. @item eof_action
  4848. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
  4849. one of the following values:
  4850. @table @option
  4851. @item repeat
  4852. Repeat the last frame (the default).
  4853. @item endall
  4854. End both streams.
  4855. @item pass
  4856. Pass the main input through.
  4857. @end table
  4858. @item eval
  4859. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  4860. It accepts the following values:
  4861. @table @samp
  4862. @item init
  4863. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  4864. when a command is processed
  4865. @item frame
  4866. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  4867. @end table
  4868. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  4869. @item shortest
  4870. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  4871. terminates. Default value is 0.
  4872. @item format
  4873. Set the format for the output video.
  4874. It accepts the following values:
  4875. @table @samp
  4876. @item yuv420
  4877. force YUV420 output
  4878. @item yuv422
  4879. force YUV422 output
  4880. @item yuv444
  4881. force YUV444 output
  4882. @item rgb
  4883. force RGB output
  4884. @end table
  4885. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  4886. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  4887. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  4888. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  4889. @option{format} instead.
  4890. @item repeatlast
  4891. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  4892. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  4893. behavior. Default value is 1.
  4894. @end table
  4895. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  4896. parameters.
  4897. @table @option
  4898. @item main_w, W
  4899. @item main_h, H
  4900. The main input width and height.
  4901. @item overlay_w, w
  4902. @item overlay_h, h
  4903. The overlay input width and height.
  4904. @item x
  4905. @item y
  4906. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  4907. each new frame.
  4908. @item hsub
  4909. @item vsub
  4910. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  4911. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  4912. @var{vsub} is 1.
  4913. @item n
  4914. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  4915. @item pos
  4916. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  4917. @item t
  4918. The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  4919. @end table
  4920. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  4921. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  4922. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  4923. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  4924. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  4925. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  4926. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
  4927. the @var{movie} filter does.
  4928. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  4929. efficiency of such approach.
  4930. @subsection Commands
  4931. This filter supports the following commands:
  4932. @table @option
  4933. @item x
  4934. @item y
  4935. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  4936. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4937. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4938. value.
  4939. @end table
  4940. @subsection Examples
  4941. @itemize
  4942. @item
  4943. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  4944. video:
  4945. @example
  4946. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  4947. @end example
  4948. Using named options the example above becomes:
  4949. @example
  4950. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  4951. @end example
  4952. @item
  4953. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  4954. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  4955. @example
  4956. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  4957. @end example
  4958. @item
  4959. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  4960. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  4961. @example
  4962. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  4963. @end example
  4964. @item
  4965. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; @code{WxH}
  4966. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  4967. @example
  4968. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  4969. @end example
  4970. @item
  4971. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  4972. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  4973. @example
  4974. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  4975. @end example
  4976. The above command is the same as:
  4977. @example
  4978. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  4979. @end example
  4980. @item
  4981. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  4982. screen starting since time 2:
  4983. @example
  4984. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  4985. @end example
  4986. @item
  4987. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  4988. @example
  4989. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  4990. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  4991. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  4992. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  4993. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  4994. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  4995. "
  4996. @end example
  4997. @item
  4998. Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  4999. @example
  5000. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  5001. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  5002. masked.avi
  5003. @end example
  5004. @item
  5005. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  5006. @example
  5007. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  5008. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  5009. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  5010. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  5011. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  5012. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  5013. @end example
  5014. @end itemize
  5015. @section owdenoise
  5016. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  5017. The filter accepts the following options:
  5018. @table @option
  5019. @item depth
  5020. Set depth.
  5021. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  5022. slow down filtering.
  5023. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  5024. @item luma_strength, ls
  5025. Set luma strength.
  5026. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5027. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5028. Set chroma strength.
  5029. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5030. @end table
  5031. @section pad
  5032. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  5033. provided @var{x}, @var{y} coordinates.
  5034. It accepts the following parameters:
  5035. @table @option
  5036. @item width, w
  5037. @item height, h
  5038. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  5039. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  5040. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  5041. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  5042. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  5043. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  5044. @item x
  5045. @item y
  5046. Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
  5047. with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
  5048. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  5049. expression, and vice versa.
  5050. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  5051. @item color
  5052. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  5053. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5054. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  5055. @end table
  5056. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  5057. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  5058. @table @option
  5059. @item in_w
  5060. @item in_h
  5061. The input video width and height.
  5062. @item iw
  5063. @item ih
  5064. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5065. @item out_w
  5066. @item out_h
  5067. The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
  5068. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions.
  5069. @item ow
  5070. @item oh
  5071. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  5072. @item x
  5073. @item y
  5074. The x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  5075. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
  5076. @item a
  5077. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5078. @item sar
  5079. input sample aspect ratio
  5080. @item dar
  5081. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  5082. @item hsub
  5083. @item vsub
  5084. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5085. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5086. @end table
  5087. @subsection Examples
  5088. @itemize
  5089. @item
  5090. Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
  5091. size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  5092. column 0, row 40
  5093. @example
  5094. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  5095. @end example
  5096. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  5097. @example
  5098. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  5099. @end example
  5100. @item
  5101. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  5102. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  5103. @example
  5104. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5105. @end example
  5106. @item
  5107. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  5108. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  5109. the center of the padded area:
  5110. @example
  5111. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5112. @end example
  5113. @item
  5114. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  5115. @example
  5116. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5117. @end example
  5118. @item
  5119. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  5120. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  5121. according to the relation:
  5122. @example
  5123. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  5124. X = output_dar / sar
  5125. @end example
  5126. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  5127. @example
  5128. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5129. @end example
  5130. @item
  5131. Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  5132. corner of the output padded area:
  5133. @example
  5134. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  5135. @end example
  5136. @end itemize
  5137. @section perspective
  5138. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  5139. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5140. @table @option
  5141. @item x0
  5142. @item y0
  5143. @item x1
  5144. @item y1
  5145. @item x2
  5146. @item y2
  5147. @item x3
  5148. @item y3
  5149. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  5150. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  5151. The expressions can use the following variables:
  5152. @table @option
  5153. @item W
  5154. @item H
  5155. the width and height of video frame.
  5156. @end table
  5157. @item interpolation
  5158. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  5159. It accepts the following values:
  5160. @table @samp
  5161. @item linear
  5162. @item cubic
  5163. @end table
  5164. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  5165. @end table
  5166. @section phase
  5167. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  5168. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  5169. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  5170. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5171. @table @option
  5172. @item mode
  5173. Set phase mode.
  5174. It accepts the following values:
  5175. @table @samp
  5176. @item t
  5177. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  5178. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  5179. @item b
  5180. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  5181. Filter will delay the top field.
  5182. @item p
  5183. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  5184. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  5185. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  5186. @item a
  5187. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  5188. opposite.
  5189. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  5190. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  5191. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  5192. @item u
  5193. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  5194. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  5195. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  5196. match between the fields.
  5197. @item T
  5198. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5199. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5200. @item B
  5201. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5202. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5203. @item A
  5204. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  5205. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  5206. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  5207. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  5208. @item U
  5209. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  5210. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  5211. @end table
  5212. @end table
  5213. @section pixdesctest
  5214. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  5215. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  5216. For example:
  5217. @example
  5218. format=monow, pixdesctest
  5219. @end example
  5220. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  5221. @section pp
  5222. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  5223. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  5224. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  5225. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  5226. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  5227. The filters accept the following options:
  5228. @table @option
  5229. @item subfilters
  5230. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  5231. @end table
  5232. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  5233. @table @option
  5234. @item a/autoq
  5235. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  5236. @item c/chrom
  5237. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  5238. @item y/nochrom
  5239. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  5240. @item n/noluma
  5241. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  5242. @end table
  5243. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  5244. Available subfilters are:
  5245. @table @option
  5246. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5247. Horizontal deblocking filter
  5248. @table @option
  5249. @item difference
  5250. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5251. @item flatness
  5252. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5253. @end table
  5254. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5255. Vertical deblocking filter
  5256. @table @option
  5257. @item difference
  5258. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5259. @item flatness
  5260. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5261. @end table
  5262. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5263. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  5264. @table @option
  5265. @item difference
  5266. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5267. @item flatness
  5268. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5269. @end table
  5270. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5271. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  5272. @table @option
  5273. @item difference
  5274. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5275. @item flatness
  5276. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5277. @end table
  5278. @end table
  5279. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  5280. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  5281. thresholds.
  5282. @table @option
  5283. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  5284. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  5285. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  5286. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  5287. @item dr/dering
  5288. Deringing filter
  5289. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  5290. @table @option
  5291. @item threshold1
  5292. larger -> stronger filtering
  5293. @item threshold2
  5294. larger -> stronger filtering
  5295. @item threshold3
  5296. larger -> stronger filtering
  5297. @end table
  5298. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  5299. @table @option
  5300. @item f/fullyrange
  5301. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  5302. @end table
  5303. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5304. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5305. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5306. @item li/linipoldeint
  5307. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5308. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5309. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5310. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5311. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5312. @item md/mediandeint
  5313. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5314. median filter to every second line.
  5315. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5316. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5317. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5318. @item l5/lowpass5
  5319. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5320. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5321. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5322. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5323. specify.
  5324. @table @option
  5325. @item quantizer
  5326. Quantizer to use
  5327. @end table
  5328. @item de/default
  5329. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5330. @item fa/fast
  5331. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5332. @item ac
  5333. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5334. @end table
  5335. @subsection Examples
  5336. @itemize
  5337. @item
  5338. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5339. brightness/contrast:
  5340. @example
  5341. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5342. @end example
  5343. @item
  5344. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5345. @example
  5346. pp=de/-al
  5347. @end example
  5348. @item
  5349. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5350. @example
  5351. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5352. @end example
  5353. @item
  5354. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5355. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5356. @example
  5357. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5358. @end example
  5359. @end itemize
  5360. @section psnr
  5361. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5362. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5363. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5364. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5365. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5366. the PSNR.
  5367. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5368. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5369. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5370. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5371. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5372. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5373. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5374. @example
  5375. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5376. @end example
  5377. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5378. image.
  5379. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5380. @table @option
  5381. @item stats_file, f
  5382. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5383. each individual frame.
  5384. @end table
  5385. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5386. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5387. couple of frames.
  5388. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5389. @table @option
  5390. @item n
  5391. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5392. @item mse_avg
  5393. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5394. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5395. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5396. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5397. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5398. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5399. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5400. specified by the suffix.
  5401. @end table
  5402. For example:
  5403. @example
  5404. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5405. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5406. @end example
  5407. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5408. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5409. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5410. @anchor{pullup}
  5411. @section pullup
  5412. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5413. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5414. content.
  5415. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5416. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5417. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5418. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5419. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5420. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5421. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5422. The filter accepts the following options:
  5423. @table @option
  5424. @item jl
  5425. @item jr
  5426. @item jt
  5427. @item jb
  5428. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5429. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5430. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5431. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5432. @item sb
  5433. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5434. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5435. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5436. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5437. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5438. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5439. Default value is @code{0}.
  5440. @item mp
  5441. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5442. @table @samp
  5443. @item l
  5444. Use luma plane.
  5445. @item u
  5446. Use chroma blue plane.
  5447. @item v
  5448. Use chroma red plane.
  5449. @end table
  5450. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5451. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5452. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5453. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5454. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5455. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5456. @end table
  5457. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5458. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5459. telecine NTSC input:
  5460. @example
  5461. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5462. @end example
  5463. @section removelogo
  5464. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5465. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5466. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5467. The filter accepts the following options:
  5468. @table @option
  5469. @item filename, f
  5470. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5471. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5472. video stream being processed.
  5473. @end table
  5474. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5475. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5476. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5477. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5478. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5479. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5480. filter once or twice.
  5481. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5482. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5483. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5484. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5485. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5486. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5487. @section rotate
  5488. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5489. The filter accepts the following options:
  5490. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5491. @table @option
  5492. @item angle, a
  5493. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5494. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5495. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5496. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5497. @item out_w, ow
  5498. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5499. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5500. @item out_h, oh
  5501. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5502. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5503. @item bilinear
  5504. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5505. it. Default value is 1.
  5506. @item fillcolor, c
  5507. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5508. image. For the generalsyntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5509. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5510. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5511. Default value is "black".
  5512. @end table
  5513. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5514. following constants and functions:
  5515. @table @option
  5516. @item n
  5517. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5518. before the first frame is filtered.
  5519. @item t
  5520. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5521. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5522. @item hsub
  5523. @item vsub
  5524. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5525. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5526. @item in_w, iw
  5527. @item in_h, ih
  5528. the input video width and height
  5529. @item out_w, ow
  5530. @item out_h, oh
  5531. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5532. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5533. @item rotw(a)
  5534. @item roth(a)
  5535. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5536. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5537. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5538. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5539. @end table
  5540. @subsection Examples
  5541. @itemize
  5542. @item
  5543. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5544. @example
  5545. rotate=PI/6
  5546. @end example
  5547. @item
  5548. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5549. @example
  5550. rotate=-PI/6
  5551. @end example
  5552. @item
  5553. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5554. @example
  5555. rotate=45*PI/180
  5556. @end example
  5557. @item
  5558. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5559. @example
  5560. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5561. @end example
  5562. @item
  5563. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5564. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5565. @example
  5566. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  5567. @end example
  5568. @item
  5569. Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
  5570. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  5571. @example
  5572. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  5573. @end example
  5574. @item
  5575. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  5576. shown:
  5577. @example
  5578. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  5579. @end example
  5580. @end itemize
  5581. @subsection Commands
  5582. The filter supports the following commands:
  5583. @table @option
  5584. @item a, angle
  5585. Set the angle expression.
  5586. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5587. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5588. value.
  5589. @end table
  5590. @section sab
  5591. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  5592. The filter accepts the following options:
  5593. @table @option
  5594. @item luma_radius, lr
  5595. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  5596. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  5597. in slower processing.
  5598. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  5599. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  5600. value is 1.0.
  5601. @item luma_strength, ls
  5602. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  5603. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  5604. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5605. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  5606. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  5607. processing.
  5608. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  5609. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  5610. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5611. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  5612. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  5613. @end table
  5614. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  5615. corresponding luma option value.
  5616. @anchor{scale}
  5617. @section scale
  5618. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  5619. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  5620. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  5621. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  5622. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  5623. requested format.
  5624. @subsection Options
  5625. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  5626. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  5627. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  5628. the complete list of scaler options.
  5629. @table @option
  5630. @item width, w
  5631. @item height, h
  5632. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  5633. dimension.
  5634. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  5635. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  5636. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  5637. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  5638. used
  5639. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  5640. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  5641. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  5642. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  5643. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  5644. expression.
  5645. @item interl
  5646. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  5647. @table @samp
  5648. @item 1
  5649. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  5650. @item 0
  5651. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  5652. @item -1
  5653. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  5654. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  5655. @end table
  5656. Default value is @samp{0}.
  5657. @item flags
  5658. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  5659. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  5660. complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
  5661. the default flags.
  5662. @item size, s
  5663. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5664. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5665. @item in_color_matrix
  5666. @item out_color_matrix
  5667. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  5668. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5669. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  5670. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  5671. Possible values:
  5672. @table @samp
  5673. @item auto
  5674. Choose automatically.
  5675. @item bt709
  5676. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  5677. Recommendation BT.709.
  5678. @item fcc
  5679. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  5680. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  5681. @item bt601
  5682. Set color space conforming to:
  5683. @itemize
  5684. @item
  5685. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  5686. @item
  5687. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  5688. @item
  5689. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  5690. @end itemize
  5691. @item smpte240m
  5692. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  5693. @end table
  5694. @item in_range
  5695. @item out_range
  5696. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  5697. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5698. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  5699. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  5700. @table @samp
  5701. @item auto
  5702. Choose automatically.
  5703. @item jpeg/full/pc
  5704. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5705. @item mpeg/tv
  5706. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5707. @end table
  5708. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  5709. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  5710. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  5711. @table @samp
  5712. @item disable
  5713. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  5714. @item decrease
  5715. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  5716. @item increase
  5717. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  5718. @end table
  5719. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  5720. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  5721. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  5722. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  5723. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  5724. 1280x533.
  5725. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  5726. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  5727. to work.
  5728. @end table
  5729. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  5730. containing the following constants:
  5731. @table @var
  5732. @item in_w
  5733. @item in_h
  5734. The input width and height
  5735. @item iw
  5736. @item ih
  5737. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5738. @item out_w
  5739. @item out_h
  5740. The output (scaled) width and height
  5741. @item ow
  5742. @item oh
  5743. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  5744. @item a
  5745. The same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5746. @item sar
  5747. input sample aspect ratio
  5748. @item dar
  5749. The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  5750. @item hsub
  5751. @item vsub
  5752. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5753. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5754. @item ohsub
  5755. @item ovsub
  5756. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5757. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5758. @end table
  5759. @subsection Examples
  5760. @itemize
  5761. @item
  5762. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
  5763. @example
  5764. scale=w=200:h=100
  5765. @end example
  5766. This is equivalent to:
  5767. @example
  5768. scale=200:100
  5769. @end example
  5770. or:
  5771. @example
  5772. scale=200x100
  5773. @end example
  5774. @item
  5775. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  5776. @example
  5777. scale=qcif
  5778. @end example
  5779. which can also be written as:
  5780. @example
  5781. scale=size=qcif
  5782. @end example
  5783. @item
  5784. Scale the input to 2x:
  5785. @example
  5786. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  5787. @end example
  5788. @item
  5789. The above is the same as:
  5790. @example
  5791. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  5792. @end example
  5793. @item
  5794. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  5795. @example
  5796. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  5797. @end example
  5798. @item
  5799. Scale the input to half size:
  5800. @example
  5801. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  5802. @end example
  5803. @item
  5804. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  5805. @example
  5806. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  5807. @end example
  5808. @item
  5809. Seek Greek harmony:
  5810. @example
  5811. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  5812. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  5813. @end example
  5814. @item
  5815. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  5816. @example
  5817. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  5818. @end example
  5819. @item
  5820. Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
  5821. subsample values:
  5822. @example
  5823. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  5824. @end example
  5825. @item
  5826. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
  5827. keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
  5828. @example
  5829. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  5830. @end example
  5831. @end itemize
  5832. @section separatefields
  5833. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  5834. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  5835. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  5836. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  5837. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  5838. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  5839. @section setdar, setsar
  5840. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  5841. output video.
  5842. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  5843. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  5844. @example
  5845. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  5846. @end example
  5847. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  5848. dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
  5849. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  5850. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  5851. applied.
  5852. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  5853. the filter output video.
  5854. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  5855. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  5856. above.
  5857. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  5858. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  5859. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  5860. It accepts the following parameters:
  5861. @table @option
  5862. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  5863. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  5864. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  5865. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  5866. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  5867. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  5868. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  5869. should be escaped.
  5870. @item max
  5871. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  5872. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  5873. Default value is @code{100}.
  5874. @end table
  5875. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  5876. the following constants:
  5877. @table @option
  5878. @item E, PI, PHI
  5879. These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
  5880. (Euler's number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
  5881. @item w, h
  5882. The input width and height.
  5883. @item a
  5884. These are the same as @var{w} / @var{h}.
  5885. @item sar
  5886. The input sample aspect ratio.
  5887. @item dar
  5888. The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
  5889. (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  5890. @item hsub, vsub
  5891. Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  5892. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5893. @end table
  5894. @subsection Examples
  5895. @itemize
  5896. @item
  5897. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  5898. @example
  5899. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5900. setdar=dar=16/9
  5901. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5902. @end example
  5903. @item
  5904. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  5905. @example
  5906. setsar=sar=10/11
  5907. @end example
  5908. @item
  5909. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  5910. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  5911. @example
  5912. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  5913. @end example
  5914. @end itemize
  5915. @anchor{setfield}
  5916. @section setfield
  5917. Force field for the output video frame.
  5918. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  5919. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  5920. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  5921. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  5922. The filter accepts the following options:
  5923. @table @option
  5924. @item mode
  5925. Available values are:
  5926. @table @samp
  5927. @item auto
  5928. Keep the same field property.
  5929. @item bff
  5930. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  5931. @item tff
  5932. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  5933. @item prog
  5934. Mark the frame as progressive.
  5935. @end table
  5936. @end table
  5937. @section showinfo
  5938. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  5939. The input video is not modified.
  5940. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  5941. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  5942. The following values are shown in the output:
  5943. @table @option
  5944. @item n
  5945. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  5946. @item pts
  5947. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5948. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  5949. @item pts_time
  5950. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5951. seconds.
  5952. @item pos
  5953. The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
  5954. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
  5955. @item fmt
  5956. The pixel format name.
  5957. @item sar
  5958. The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  5959. @var{num}/@var{den}.
  5960. @item s
  5961. The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5962. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5963. @item i
  5964. The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  5965. for bottom field first).
  5966. @item iskey
  5967. This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
  5968. @item type
  5969. The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  5970. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
  5971. Also refer to the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  5972. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  5973. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  5974. @item checksum
  5975. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
  5976. @item plane_checksum
  5977. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  5978. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]".
  5979. @end table
  5980. @section shuffleplanes
  5981. Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
  5982. It accepts the following parameters:
  5983. @table @option
  5984. @item map0
  5985. The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
  5986. @item map1
  5987. The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
  5988. @item map2
  5989. The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
  5990. @item map3
  5991. The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
  5992. @end table
  5993. The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
  5994. Swap the second and third planes of the input:
  5995. @example
  5996. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
  5997. @end example
  5998. @section signalstats
  5999. Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
  6000. with the digitization of analog video media.
  6001. By default the filter will log these metadata values:
  6002. @table @option
  6003. @item YMIN
  6004. Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6005. range of [0-255].
  6006. @item YLOW
  6007. Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6008. range of [0-255].
  6009. @item YAVG
  6010. Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6011. [0-255].
  6012. @item YHIGH
  6013. Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6014. range of [0-255].
  6015. @item YMAX
  6016. Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6017. range of [0-255].
  6018. @item UMIN
  6019. Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6020. range of [0-255].
  6021. @item ULOW
  6022. Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6023. range of [0-255].
  6024. @item UAVG
  6025. Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6026. [0-255].
  6027. @item UHIGH
  6028. Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6029. range of [0-255].
  6030. @item UMAX
  6031. Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6032. range of [0-255].
  6033. @item VMIN
  6034. Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6035. range of [0-255].
  6036. @item VLOW
  6037. Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6038. range of [0-255].
  6039. @item VAVG
  6040. Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6041. [0-255].
  6042. @item VHIGH
  6043. Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6044. range of [0-255].
  6045. @item VMAX
  6046. Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6047. range of [0-255].
  6048. @item SATMIN
  6049. Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6050. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6051. @item SATLOW
  6052. Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
  6053. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6054. @item SATAVG
  6055. Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
  6056. of [0-~181.02].
  6057. @item SATHIGH
  6058. Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
  6059. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6060. @item SATMAX
  6061. Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6062. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6063. @item HUEMED
  6064. Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6065. [0-360].
  6066. @item HUEAVG
  6067. Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6068. [0-360].
  6069. @item YDIF
  6070. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
  6071. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6072. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6073. @item UDIF
  6074. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
  6075. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6076. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6077. @item VDIF
  6078. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
  6079. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6080. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6081. @end table
  6082. The filter accepts the following options:
  6083. @table @option
  6084. @item stat
  6085. @item out
  6086. @option{stat} specify an additional form of image analysis.
  6087. @option{out} output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
  6088. Both options accept the following values:
  6089. @table @samp
  6090. @item tout
  6091. Identify @var{temporal outliers} pixels. A @var{temporal outlier} is a pixel
  6092. unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
  6093. include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
  6094. @item vrep
  6095. Identify @var{vertical line repetition}. Vertical line repetition includes
  6096. similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
  6097. repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
  6098. analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
  6099. analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
  6100. @item brng
  6101. Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
  6102. @end table
  6103. @item color, c
  6104. Set the highlight color for the @option{out} option. The default color is
  6105. yellow.
  6106. @end table
  6107. @subsection Examples
  6108. @itemize
  6109. @item
  6110. Output data of various video metrics:
  6111. @example
  6112. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames
  6113. @end example
  6114. @item
  6115. Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:
  6116. @example
  6117. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN
  6118. @end example
  6119. @item
  6120. Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.
  6121. @example
  6122. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"
  6123. @end example
  6124. @item
  6125. Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.
  6126. @example
  6127. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt
  6128. @end example
  6129. The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:
  6130. @example
  6131. time %@{pts:hms@}
  6132. Y (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX@})
  6133. U (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX@})
  6134. V (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX@})
  6135. saturation maximum: %@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX@}
  6136. @end example
  6137. @end itemize
  6138. @anchor{smartblur}
  6139. @section smartblur
  6140. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  6141. It accepts the following options:
  6142. @table @option
  6143. @item luma_radius, lr
  6144. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6145. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6146. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6147. @item luma_strength, ls
  6148. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6149. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6150. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6151. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6152. @item luma_threshold, lt
  6153. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6154. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6155. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6156. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6157. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6158. @item chroma_radius, cr
  6159. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6160. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6161. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6162. @item chroma_strength, cs
  6163. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6164. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6165. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6166. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6167. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  6168. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6169. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6170. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6171. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6172. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6173. @end table
  6174. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  6175. is set.
  6176. @section stereo3d
  6177. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  6178. The filters accept the following options:
  6179. @table @option
  6180. @item in
  6181. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  6182. Available values for input image formats are:
  6183. @table @samp
  6184. @item sbsl
  6185. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  6186. @item sbsr
  6187. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  6188. @item sbs2l
  6189. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  6190. (left eye left, right eye right)
  6191. @item sbs2r
  6192. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  6193. (right eye left, left eye right)
  6194. @item abl
  6195. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  6196. @item abr
  6197. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  6198. @item ab2l
  6199. above-below with half height resolution
  6200. (left eye above, right eye below)
  6201. @item ab2r
  6202. above-below with half height resolution
  6203. (right eye above, left eye below)
  6204. @item al
  6205. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  6206. @item ar
  6207. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  6208. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  6209. @end table
  6210. @item out
  6211. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  6212. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  6213. @table @samp
  6214. @item arbg
  6215. anaglyph red/blue gray
  6216. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6217. @item argg
  6218. anaglyph red/green gray
  6219. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  6220. @item arcg
  6221. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  6222. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6223. @item arch
  6224. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  6225. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6226. @item arcc
  6227. anaglyph red/cyan color
  6228. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6229. @item arcd
  6230. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6231. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6232. @item agmg
  6233. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  6234. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6235. @item agmh
  6236. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  6237. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6238. @item agmc
  6239. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  6240. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6241. @item agmd
  6242. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6243. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6244. @item aybg
  6245. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  6246. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6247. @item aybh
  6248. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  6249. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6250. @item aybc
  6251. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  6252. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6253. @item aybd
  6254. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6255. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6256. @item irl
  6257. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  6258. @item irr
  6259. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  6260. @item ml
  6261. mono output (left eye only)
  6262. @item mr
  6263. mono output (right eye only)
  6264. @end table
  6265. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  6266. @end table
  6267. @subsection Examples
  6268. @itemize
  6269. @item
  6270. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  6271. @example
  6272. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  6273. @end example
  6274. @item
  6275. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  6276. @example
  6277. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  6278. @end example
  6279. @end itemize
  6280. @section spp
  6281. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  6282. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  6283. and average the results.
  6284. The filter accepts the following options:
  6285. @table @option
  6286. @item quality
  6287. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  6288. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  6289. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  6290. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  6291. @code{3}.
  6292. @item qp
  6293. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  6294. from the video stream (if available).
  6295. @item mode
  6296. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  6297. @table @samp
  6298. @item hard
  6299. Set hard thresholding (default).
  6300. @item soft
  6301. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  6302. @end table
  6303. @item use_bframe_qp
  6304. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  6305. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  6306. @code{0} (not enabled).
  6307. @end table
  6308. @anchor{subtitles}
  6309. @section subtitles
  6310. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  6311. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6312. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  6313. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  6314. Alpha) subtitles format.
  6315. The filter accepts the following options:
  6316. @table @option
  6317. @item filename, f
  6318. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  6319. @item original_size
  6320. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  6321. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
  6322. the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
  6323. this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
  6324. changed.
  6325. @item charenc
  6326. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  6327. useful if not UTF-8.
  6328. @item stream_index, si
  6329. Set subtitles stream index. @code{subtitles} filter only.
  6330. @end table
  6331. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  6332. specifies the @option{filename}.
  6333. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  6334. video, use the command:
  6335. @example
  6336. subtitles=sub.srt
  6337. @end example
  6338. which is equivalent to:
  6339. @example
  6340. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  6341. @end example
  6342. To render the default subtitles stream from file @file{video.mkv}, use:
  6343. @example
  6344. subtitles=video.mkv
  6345. @end example
  6346. To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
  6347. @example
  6348. subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
  6349. @end example
  6350. @section super2xsai
  6351. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  6352. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  6353. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  6354. @section swapuv
  6355. Swap U & V plane.
  6356. @section telecine
  6357. Apply telecine process to the video.
  6358. This filter accepts the following options:
  6359. @table @option
  6360. @item first_field
  6361. @table @samp
  6362. @item top, t
  6363. top field first
  6364. @item bottom, b
  6365. bottom field first
  6366. The default value is @code{top}.
  6367. @end table
  6368. @item pattern
  6369. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  6370. The default value is @code{23}.
  6371. @end table
  6372. @example
  6373. Some typical patterns:
  6374. NTSC output (30i):
  6375. 27.5p: 32222
  6376. 24p: 23 (classic)
  6377. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  6378. 20p: 33
  6379. 18p: 334
  6380. 16p: 3444
  6381. PAL output (25i):
  6382. 27.5p: 12222
  6383. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  6384. 16.67p: 33
  6385. 16p: 33333334
  6386. @end example
  6387. @section thumbnail
  6388. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  6389. The filter accepts the following options:
  6390. @table @option
  6391. @item n
  6392. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  6393. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  6394. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  6395. @end table
  6396. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  6397. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  6398. @subsection Examples
  6399. @itemize
  6400. @item
  6401. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  6402. @example
  6403. thumbnail=50
  6404. @end example
  6405. @item
  6406. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6407. @example
  6408. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  6409. @end example
  6410. @end itemize
  6411. @section tile
  6412. Tile several successive frames together.
  6413. The filter accepts the following options:
  6414. @table @option
  6415. @item layout
  6416. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  6417. this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6418. @item nb_frames
  6419. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  6420. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  6421. the area will be used.
  6422. @item margin
  6423. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  6424. @item padding
  6425. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  6426. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  6427. refer to the pad video filter.
  6428. @item color
  6429. Specify the color of the unused areaFor the syntax of this option, check the
  6430. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  6431. is "black".
  6432. @end table
  6433. @subsection Examples
  6434. @itemize
  6435. @item
  6436. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  6437. @example
  6438. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  6439. @end example
  6440. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  6441. duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
  6442. rate.
  6443. @item
  6444. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  6445. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  6446. mixed flat and named options:
  6447. @example
  6448. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  6449. @end example
  6450. @end itemize
  6451. @section tinterlace
  6452. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  6453. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  6454. considered odd.
  6455. The filter accepts the following options:
  6456. @table @option
  6457. @item mode
  6458. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  6459. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  6460. Available values are:
  6461. @table @samp
  6462. @item merge, 0
  6463. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  6464. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  6465. @item drop_odd, 1
  6466. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6467. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6468. @item drop_even, 2
  6469. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6470. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6471. @item pad, 3
  6472. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6473. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6474. @item interleave_top, 4
  6475. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6476. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6477. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  6478. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  6479. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6480. @item interlacex2, 6
  6481. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  6482. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  6483. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  6484. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  6485. field synchronisation.
  6486. @end table
  6487. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  6488. compatibility reasons.
  6489. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  6490. @item flags
  6491. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  6492. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  6493. @table @option
  6494. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  6495. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  6496. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  6497. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  6498. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  6499. patterning.
  6500. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  6501. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  6502. @end table
  6503. @end table
  6504. @section transpose
  6505. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  6506. It accepts the following parameters:
  6507. @table @option
  6508. @item dir
  6509. Specify the transposition direction.
  6510. Can assume the following values:
  6511. @table @samp
  6512. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  6513. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  6514. @example
  6515. L.R L.l
  6516. . . -> . .
  6517. l.r R.r
  6518. @end example
  6519. @item 1, 5, clock
  6520. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  6521. @example
  6522. L.R l.L
  6523. . . -> . .
  6524. l.r r.R
  6525. @end example
  6526. @item 2, 6, cclock
  6527. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  6528. @example
  6529. L.R R.r
  6530. . . -> . .
  6531. l.r L.l
  6532. @end example
  6533. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  6534. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  6535. @example
  6536. L.R r.R
  6537. . . -> . .
  6538. l.r l.L
  6539. @end example
  6540. @end table
  6541. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  6542. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  6543. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  6544. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  6545. symbolic constants.
  6546. @item passthrough
  6547. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  6548. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  6549. @table @samp
  6550. @item none
  6551. Always apply transposition.
  6552. @item portrait
  6553. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  6554. @item landscape
  6555. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  6556. @end table
  6557. Default value is @code{none}.
  6558. @end table
  6559. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  6560. layout:
  6561. @example
  6562. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  6563. @end example
  6564. The command above can also be specified as:
  6565. @example
  6566. transpose=1:portrait
  6567. @end example
  6568. @section trim
  6569. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  6570. It accepts the following parameters:
  6571. @table @option
  6572. @item start
  6573. Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  6574. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  6575. @item end
  6576. Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  6577. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  6578. frame in the output.
  6579. @item start_pts
  6580. This is the same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp
  6581. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6582. @item end_pts
  6583. This is the same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp
  6584. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6585. @item duration
  6586. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  6587. @item start_frame
  6588. The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
  6589. @item end_frame
  6590. The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  6591. @end table
  6592. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  6593. duration specifications; see
  6594. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  6595. for the accepted syntax.
  6596. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  6597. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  6598. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  6599. the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
  6600. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  6601. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  6602. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  6603. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  6604. filters.
  6605. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  6606. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  6607. Examples:
  6608. @itemize
  6609. @item
  6610. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  6611. @example
  6612. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  6613. @end example
  6614. @item
  6615. Keep only the first second:
  6616. @example
  6617. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  6618. @end example
  6619. @end itemize
  6620. @section unsharp
  6621. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  6622. It accepts the following parameters:
  6623. @table @option
  6624. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  6625. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  6626. 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6627. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  6628. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  6629. and 63. The default value is 5.
  6630. @item luma_amount, la
  6631. Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6632. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6633. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6634. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6635. Default value is 1.0.
  6636. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  6637. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  6638. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6639. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  6640. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  6641. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6642. @item chroma_amount, ca
  6643. Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6644. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6645. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6646. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6647. Default value is 0.0.
  6648. @item opencl
  6649. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  6650. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  6651. @end table
  6652. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  6653. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  6654. @subsection Examples
  6655. @itemize
  6656. @item
  6657. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  6658. @example
  6659. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  6660. @end example
  6661. @item
  6662. Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  6663. @example
  6664. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  6665. @end example
  6666. @end itemize
  6667. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  6668. @section vidstabdetect
  6669. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  6670. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  6671. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  6672. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  6673. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  6674. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6675. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6676. This filter accepts the following options:
  6677. @table @option
  6678. @item result
  6679. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  6680. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  6681. @item shakiness
  6682. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  6683. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  6684. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  6685. @item accuracy
  6686. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  6687. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  6688. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  6689. @item stepsize
  6690. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  6691. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  6692. @item mincontrast
  6693. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  6694. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  6695. value is 0.3.
  6696. @item tripod
  6697. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  6698. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  6699. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  6700. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  6701. the camera view absolutely still.
  6702. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  6703. @item show
  6704. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  6705. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  6706. visualization.
  6707. @end table
  6708. @subsection Examples
  6709. @itemize
  6710. @item
  6711. Use default values:
  6712. @example
  6713. vidstabdetect
  6714. @end example
  6715. @item
  6716. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  6717. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  6718. @example
  6719. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  6720. @end example
  6721. @item
  6722. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  6723. video:
  6724. @example
  6725. vidstabdetect=show=1
  6726. @end example
  6727. @item
  6728. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  6729. @example
  6730. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  6731. @end example
  6732. @end itemize
  6733. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  6734. @section vidstabtransform
  6735. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  6736. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  6737. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  6738. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  6739. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  6740. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  6741. the unsharp filter, see below.
  6742. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6743. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6744. @subsection Options
  6745. @table @option
  6746. @item input
  6747. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  6748. @file{transforms.trf}).
  6749. @item smoothing
  6750. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  6751. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  6752. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  6753. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  6754. larger values leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration
  6755. of the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a
  6756. static camera is simulated.
  6757. @item optalgo
  6758. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  6759. Accepted values are:
  6760. @table @samp
  6761. @item gauss
  6762. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  6763. @item avg
  6764. averaging on transformations
  6765. @end table
  6766. @item maxshift
  6767. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  6768. meaning no limit.
  6769. @item maxangle
  6770. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  6771. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  6772. @item crop
  6773. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  6774. compensation.
  6775. Available values are:
  6776. @table @samp
  6777. @item keep
  6778. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  6779. @item black
  6780. fill the border black
  6781. @end table
  6782. @item invert
  6783. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  6784. @item relative
  6785. Consider transforms as relative to previsou frame if set to 1,
  6786. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  6787. @item zoom
  6788. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  6789. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  6790. zoom).
  6791. @item optzoom
  6792. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  6793. Accepted values are:
  6794. @table @samp
  6795. @item 0
  6796. disabled
  6797. @item 1
  6798. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  6799. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  6800. @item 2
  6801. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  6802. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  6803. @end table
  6804. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  6805. @item zoomspeed
  6806. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  6807. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  6808. 0.25.
  6809. @item interpol
  6810. Specify type of interpolation.
  6811. Available values are:
  6812. @table @samp
  6813. @item no
  6814. no interpolation
  6815. @item linear
  6816. linear only horizontal
  6817. @item bilinear
  6818. linear in both directions (default)
  6819. @item bicubic
  6820. cubic in both directions (slow)
  6821. @end table
  6822. @item tripod
  6823. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  6824. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  6825. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  6826. @item debug
  6827. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  6828. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  6829. value is 0.
  6830. @end table
  6831. @subsection Examples
  6832. @itemize
  6833. @item
  6834. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  6835. @example
  6836. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  6837. @end example
  6838. Note the use of the unsharp filter which is always recommended.
  6839. @item
  6840. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  6841. @example
  6842. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  6843. @end example
  6844. @item
  6845. Smoothen the video even more:
  6846. @example
  6847. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  6848. @end example
  6849. @end itemize
  6850. @section vflip
  6851. Flip the input video vertically.
  6852. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6853. @example
  6854. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  6855. @end example
  6856. @anchor{vignette}
  6857. @section vignette
  6858. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  6859. The filter accepts the following options:
  6860. @table @option
  6861. @item angle, a
  6862. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  6863. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  6864. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  6865. @item x0
  6866. @item y0
  6867. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  6868. by default.
  6869. @item mode
  6870. Set forward/backward mode.
  6871. Available modes are:
  6872. @table @samp
  6873. @item forward
  6874. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  6875. @item backward
  6876. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  6877. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  6878. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  6879. also be used to create a burning effect.
  6880. @end table
  6881. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  6882. @item eval
  6883. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  6884. It accepts the following values:
  6885. @table @samp
  6886. @item init
  6887. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  6888. @item frame
  6889. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  6890. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  6891. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  6892. @end table
  6893. Default value is @samp{init}.
  6894. @item dither
  6895. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  6896. (enabled).
  6897. @item aspect
  6898. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  6899. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  6900. following the dimensions of the video.
  6901. Default is @code{1/1}.
  6902. @end table
  6903. @subsection Expressions
  6904. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  6905. following parameters.
  6906. @table @option
  6907. @item w
  6908. @item h
  6909. input width and height
  6910. @item n
  6911. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  6912. @item pts
  6913. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  6914. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  6915. @item r
  6916. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  6917. @item t
  6918. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  6919. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  6920. @item tb
  6921. time base of the input video
  6922. @end table
  6923. @subsection Examples
  6924. @itemize
  6925. @item
  6926. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  6927. @example
  6928. vignette=PI/4
  6929. @end example
  6930. @item
  6931. Make a flickering vignetting:
  6932. @example
  6933. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  6934. @end example
  6935. @end itemize
  6936. @section w3fdif
  6937. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  6938. Deinterlacing Filter").
  6939. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  6940. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  6941. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  6942. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  6943. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  6944. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  6945. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  6946. @table @option
  6947. @item filter
  6948. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  6949. @table @samp
  6950. @item simple
  6951. Simple filter coefficient set.
  6952. @item complex
  6953. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  6954. @end table
  6955. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  6956. @item deint
  6957. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  6958. @table @samp
  6959. @item all
  6960. Deinterlace all frames,
  6961. @item interlaced
  6962. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  6963. @end table
  6964. Default value is @samp{all}.
  6965. @end table
  6966. @anchor{yadif}
  6967. @section yadif
  6968. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  6969. filter").
  6970. It accepts the following parameters:
  6971. @table @option
  6972. @item mode
  6973. The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
  6974. @table @option
  6975. @item 0, send_frame
  6976. Output one frame for each frame.
  6977. @item 1, send_field
  6978. Output one frame for each field.
  6979. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  6980. Like @code{send_frame}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  6981. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  6982. Like @code{send_field}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  6983. @end table
  6984. The default value is @code{send_frame}.
  6985. @item parity
  6986. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
  6987. of the following values:
  6988. @table @option
  6989. @item 0, tff
  6990. Assume the top field is first.
  6991. @item 1, bff
  6992. Assume the bottom field is first.
  6993. @item -1, auto
  6994. Enable automatic detection of field parity.
  6995. @end table
  6996. The default value is @code{auto}.
  6997. If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
  6998. top field first will be assumed.
  6999. @item deint
  7000. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  7001. values:
  7002. @table @option
  7003. @item 0, all
  7004. Deinterlace all frames.
  7005. @item 1, interlaced
  7006. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7007. @end table
  7008. The default value is @code{all}.
  7009. @end table
  7010. @section zoompan
  7011. Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
  7012. This filter accepts the following options:
  7013. @table @option
  7014. @item zoom, z
  7015. Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
  7016. @item x
  7017. @item y
  7018. Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
  7019. @item d
  7020. Set the duration expression in number of frames.
  7021. This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
  7022. single input image.
  7023. @item s
  7024. Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.
  7025. @end table
  7026. Each expression can contain the following constants:
  7027. @table @option
  7028. @item in_w, iw
  7029. Input width.
  7030. @item in_h, ih
  7031. Input height.
  7032. @item out_w, ow
  7033. Output width.
  7034. @item out_h, oh
  7035. Output height.
  7036. @item in
  7037. Input frame count.
  7038. @item on
  7039. Output frame count.
  7040. @item x
  7041. @item y
  7042. Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
  7043. for current input frame.
  7044. @item px
  7045. @item py
  7046. 'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
  7047. not yet such frame (first input frame).
  7048. @item zoom
  7049. Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.
  7050. @item pzoom
  7051. Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
  7052. @item duration
  7053. Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
  7054. for each input frame.
  7055. @item pduration
  7056. number of output frames created for previous input frame
  7057. @item a
  7058. Rational number: input width / input height
  7059. @item sar
  7060. sample aspect ratio
  7061. @item dar
  7062. display aspect ratio
  7063. @end table
  7064. @subsection Examples
  7065. @itemize
  7066. @item
  7067. Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
  7068. @example
  7069. zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
  7070. @end example
  7071. @end itemize
  7072. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  7073. @chapter Video Sources
  7074. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  7075. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  7076. @section buffer
  7077. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  7078. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  7079. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  7080. It accepts the following parameters:
  7081. @table @option
  7082. @item video_size
  7083. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  7084. syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
  7085. manual.
  7086. @item width
  7087. The input video width.
  7088. @item height
  7089. The input video height.
  7090. @item pix_fmt
  7091. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  7092. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  7093. name.
  7094. @item time_base
  7095. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  7096. @item frame_rate
  7097. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  7098. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  7099. The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
  7100. @item sws_param
  7101. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  7102. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  7103. input size or format.
  7104. @end table
  7105. For example:
  7106. @example
  7107. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  7108. @end example
  7109. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  7110. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  7111. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  7112. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  7113. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  7114. this example corresponds to:
  7115. @example
  7116. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  7117. @end example
  7118. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  7119. syntax is deprecated:
  7120. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  7121. @section cellauto
  7122. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  7123. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  7124. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  7125. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  7126. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  7127. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  7128. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  7129. This source accepts the following options:
  7130. @table @option
  7131. @item filename, f
  7132. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7133. the specified file.
  7134. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  7135. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7136. file will be ignored.
  7137. @item pattern, p
  7138. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7139. the specified string.
  7140. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  7141. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7142. string will be ignored.
  7143. @item rate, r
  7144. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7145. Default is 25.
  7146. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7147. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  7148. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  7149. 1/PHI.
  7150. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  7151. @item random_seed, seed
  7152. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  7153. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7154. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7155. effort basis.
  7156. @item rule
  7157. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  7158. Default value is 110.
  7159. @item size, s
  7160. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
  7161. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7162. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  7163. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  7164. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  7165. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  7166. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  7167. larger row.
  7168. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  7169. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  7170. @item scroll
  7171. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  7172. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  7173. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  7174. Defaults to 1.
  7175. @item start_full, full
  7176. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  7177. outputting the first frame.
  7178. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7179. @item stitch
  7180. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  7181. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7182. @end table
  7183. @subsection Examples
  7184. @itemize
  7185. @item
  7186. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  7187. size 200x400.
  7188. @example
  7189. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  7190. @end example
  7191. @item
  7192. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  7193. ratio of 2/3:
  7194. @example
  7195. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7196. @end example
  7197. @item
  7198. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  7199. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  7200. @example
  7201. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7202. @end example
  7203. @item
  7204. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  7205. @example
  7206. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7207. @end example
  7208. @end itemize
  7209. @section mandelbrot
  7210. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  7211. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  7212. This source accepts the following options:
  7213. @table @option
  7214. @item end_pts
  7215. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  7216. @item end_scale
  7217. Set the terminal scale value.
  7218. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  7219. @item inner
  7220. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  7221. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  7222. It shall assume one of the following values:
  7223. @table @option
  7224. @item black
  7225. Set black mode.
  7226. @item convergence
  7227. Show time until convergence.
  7228. @item mincol
  7229. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  7230. @item period
  7231. Set period mode.
  7232. @end table
  7233. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  7234. @item bailout
  7235. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  7236. @item maxiter
  7237. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  7238. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  7239. @item outer
  7240. Set outer coloring mode.
  7241. It shall assume one of following values:
  7242. @table @option
  7243. @item iteration_count
  7244. Set iteration cound mode.
  7245. @item normalized_iteration_count
  7246. set normalized iteration count mode.
  7247. @end table
  7248. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  7249. @item rate, r
  7250. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  7251. value is "25".
  7252. @item size, s
  7253. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  7254. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  7255. @item start_scale
  7256. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  7257. @item start_x
  7258. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  7259. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  7260. @item start_y
  7261. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  7262. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  7263. @end table
  7264. @section mptestsrc
  7265. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  7266. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  7267. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  7268. This source accepts the following options:
  7269. @table @option
  7270. @item rate, r
  7271. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7272. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7273. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7274. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7275. "25".
  7276. @item duration, d
  7277. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7278. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7279. for the accepted syntax.
  7280. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7281. supposed to be generated forever.
  7282. @item test, t
  7283. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  7284. @table @option
  7285. @item dc_luma
  7286. @item dc_chroma
  7287. @item freq_luma
  7288. @item freq_chroma
  7289. @item amp_luma
  7290. @item amp_chroma
  7291. @item cbp
  7292. @item mv
  7293. @item ring1
  7294. @item ring2
  7295. @item all
  7296. @end table
  7297. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  7298. @end table
  7299. Some examples:
  7300. @example
  7301. mptestsrc=t=dc_luma
  7302. @end example
  7303. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  7304. @section frei0r_src
  7305. Provide a frei0r source.
  7306. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  7307. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  7308. This source accepts the following parameters:
  7309. @table @option
  7310. @item size
  7311. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7312. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7313. @item framerate
  7314. The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
  7315. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  7316. @item filter_name
  7317. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  7318. how to set the parameters, read the @ref{frei0r} section in the video filters
  7319. documentation.
  7320. @item filter_params
  7321. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  7322. @end table
  7323. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  7324. and frame rate 10 which is overlayed on the overlay filter main input:
  7325. @example
  7326. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  7327. @end example
  7328. @section life
  7329. Generate a life pattern.
  7330. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  7331. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  7332. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  7333. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  7334. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  7335. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  7336. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  7337. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows one to specify
  7338. the rule to adopt.
  7339. This source accepts the following options:
  7340. @table @option
  7341. @item filename, f
  7342. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  7343. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  7344. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  7345. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  7346. randomly.
  7347. @item rate, r
  7348. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7349. Default is 25.
  7350. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7351. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  7352. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  7353. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  7354. @item random_seed, seed
  7355. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  7356. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7357. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7358. effort basis.
  7359. @item rule
  7360. Set the life rule.
  7361. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  7362. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  7363. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  7364. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  7365. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  7366. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  7367. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  7368. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  7369. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  7370. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  7371. higher number of neighbor cells.
  7372. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  7373. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  7374. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  7375. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  7376. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  7377. a dead cell.
  7378. @item size, s
  7379. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7380. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7381. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  7382. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  7383. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  7384. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  7385. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  7386. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  7387. @item stitch
  7388. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  7389. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  7390. @item mold
  7391. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  7392. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  7393. value from 0 to 255.
  7394. @item life_color
  7395. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  7396. @item death_color
  7397. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  7398. used to represent a dead cell.
  7399. @item mold_color
  7400. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  7401. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  7402. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7403. @end table
  7404. @subsection Examples
  7405. @itemize
  7406. @item
  7407. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  7408. 300x300 pixels:
  7409. @example
  7410. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  7411. @end example
  7412. @item
  7413. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  7414. @example
  7415. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7416. @end example
  7417. @item
  7418. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  7419. @example
  7420. life=rule=S14/B34
  7421. @end example
  7422. @item
  7423. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  7424. @example
  7425. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  7426. @end example
  7427. @end itemize
  7428. @anchor{color}
  7429. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  7430. @anchor{nullsrc}
  7431. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  7432. @anchor{smptebars}
  7433. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  7434. @anchor{testsrc}
  7435. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  7436. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  7437. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  7438. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  7439. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  7440. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  7441. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  7442. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  7443. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  7444. stripe from top to bottom.
  7445. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7446. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  7447. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7448. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  7449. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  7450. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  7451. intended for testing purposes.
  7452. The sources accept the following parameters:
  7453. @table @option
  7454. @item color, c
  7455. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  7456. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  7457. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7458. @item level
  7459. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  7460. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  7461. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  7462. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  7463. @item size, s
  7464. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7465. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
  7466. "320x240".
  7467. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  7468. @item rate, r
  7469. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7470. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7471. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7472. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7473. "25".
  7474. @item sar
  7475. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  7476. @item duration, d
  7477. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7478. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7479. for the accepted syntax.
  7480. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7481. supposed to be generated forever.
  7482. @item decimals, n
  7483. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  7484. @code{testsrc} source.
  7485. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  7486. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  7487. value. Default value is 0.
  7488. @end table
  7489. For example the following:
  7490. @example
  7491. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  7492. @end example
  7493. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  7494. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  7495. The following graph description will generate a red source
  7496. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  7497. frames per second.
  7498. @example
  7499. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  7500. @end example
  7501. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  7502. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  7503. the @code{geq} filter:
  7504. @example
  7505. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  7506. @end example
  7507. @subsection Commands
  7508. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  7509. @table @option
  7510. @item c, color
  7511. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  7512. corresponding @option{color} option.
  7513. @end table
  7514. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  7515. @chapter Video Sinks
  7516. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  7517. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  7518. @section buffersink
  7519. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  7520. graph.
  7521. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  7522. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  7523. or the options system.
  7524. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  7525. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  7526. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  7527. @section nullsink
  7528. Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  7529. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  7530. tools.
  7531. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  7532. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  7533. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7534. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  7535. @section avectorscope
  7536. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  7537. scope.
  7538. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  7539. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  7540. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  7541. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  7542. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  7543. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  7544. The filter accepts the following options:
  7545. @table @option
  7546. @item mode, m
  7547. Set the vectorscope mode.
  7548. Available values are:
  7549. @table @samp
  7550. @item lissajous
  7551. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  7552. @item lissajous_xy
  7553. Same as above but not rotated.
  7554. @end table
  7555. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  7556. @item size, s
  7557. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  7558. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  7559. @item rate, r
  7560. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  7561. @item rc
  7562. @item gc
  7563. @item bc
  7564. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  7565. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7566. @item rf
  7567. @item gf
  7568. @item bf
  7569. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  7570. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7571. @item zoom
  7572. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  7573. @end table
  7574. @subsection Examples
  7575. @itemize
  7576. @item
  7577. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  7578. @example
  7579. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7580. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  7581. @end example
  7582. @end itemize
  7583. @section concat
  7584. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  7585. other.
  7586. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  7587. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  7588. also be the number of streams at output.
  7589. The filter accepts the following options:
  7590. @table @option
  7591. @item n
  7592. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  7593. @item v
  7594. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  7595. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  7596. @item a
  7597. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
  7598. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  7599. @item unsafe
  7600. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  7601. @end table
  7602. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  7603. @var{a} audio outputs.
  7604. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  7605. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  7606. segment, etc.
  7607. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  7608. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  7609. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  7610. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  7611. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  7612. audio streams with silence.
  7613. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  7614. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  7615. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  7616. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  7617. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  7618. explicitly by the user.
  7619. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  7620. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  7621. @subsection Examples
  7622. @itemize
  7623. @item
  7624. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  7625. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  7626. @example
  7627. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  7628. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  7629. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  7630. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  7631. @end example
  7632. @item
  7633. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  7634. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  7635. @example
  7636. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  7637. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  7638. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  7639. @end example
  7640. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  7641. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  7642. @end itemize
  7643. @section ebur128
  7644. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  7645. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  7646. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  7647. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  7648. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  7649. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  7650. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  7651. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  7652. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  7653. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  7654. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  7655. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  7656. The filter accepts the following options:
  7657. @table @option
  7658. @item video
  7659. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  7660. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  7661. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  7662. @item size
  7663. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  7664. option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
  7665. and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  7666. @item meter
  7667. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  7668. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  7669. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  7670. @item metadata
  7671. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  7672. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  7673. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  7674. Default is @code{0}.
  7675. @item framelog
  7676. Force the frame logging level.
  7677. Available values are:
  7678. @table @samp
  7679. @item info
  7680. information logging level
  7681. @item verbose
  7682. verbose logging level
  7683. @end table
  7684. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  7685. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  7686. @item peak
  7687. Set peak mode(s).
  7688. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  7689. values are:
  7690. @table @samp
  7691. @item none
  7692. Disable any peak mode (default).
  7693. @item sample
  7694. Enable sample-peak mode.
  7695. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  7696. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  7697. @item true
  7698. Enable true-peak mode.
  7699. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  7700. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  7701. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  7702. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  7703. @end table
  7704. @end table
  7705. @subsection Examples
  7706. @itemize
  7707. @item
  7708. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  7709. @example
  7710. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  7711. @end example
  7712. @item
  7713. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7714. @example
  7715. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  7716. @end example
  7717. @end itemize
  7718. @section interleave, ainterleave
  7719. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  7720. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  7721. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  7722. queued frame to the output.
  7723. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  7724. timestamp values.
  7725. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  7726. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  7727. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  7728. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  7729. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  7730. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  7731. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  7732. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  7733. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  7734. the queue is already filled.
  7735. These filters accept the following options:
  7736. @table @option
  7737. @item nb_inputs, n
  7738. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  7739. @end table
  7740. @subsection Examples
  7741. @itemize
  7742. @item
  7743. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  7744. @example
  7745. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  7746. @end example
  7747. @item
  7748. Add flickering blur effect:
  7749. @example
  7750. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  7751. @end example
  7752. @end itemize
  7753. @section perms, aperms
  7754. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  7755. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  7756. following filter in the filtergraph.
  7757. The filters accept the following options:
  7758. @table @option
  7759. @item mode
  7760. Select the permissions mode.
  7761. It accepts the following values:
  7762. @table @samp
  7763. @item none
  7764. Do nothing. This is the default.
  7765. @item ro
  7766. Set all the output frames read-only.
  7767. @item rw
  7768. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  7769. @item toggle
  7770. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  7771. @item random
  7772. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  7773. @end table
  7774. @item seed
  7775. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  7776. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  7777. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  7778. basis.
  7779. @end table
  7780. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  7781. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  7782. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  7783. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  7784. @section select, aselect
  7785. Select frames to pass in output.
  7786. This filter accepts the following options:
  7787. @table @option
  7788. @item expr, e
  7789. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  7790. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  7791. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  7792. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  7793. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  7794. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  7795. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  7796. @item outputs, n
  7797. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  7798. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  7799. @end table
  7800. The expression can contain the following constants:
  7801. @table @option
  7802. @item n
  7803. The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
  7804. @item selected_n
  7805. The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
  7806. @item prev_selected_n
  7807. The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7808. @item TB
  7809. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  7810. @item pts
  7811. The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7812. expressed in @var{TB} units. It's NAN if undefined.
  7813. @item t
  7814. The PTS of the filtered video frame,
  7815. expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.
  7816. @item prev_pts
  7817. The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7818. @item prev_selected_pts
  7819. The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7820. @item prev_selected_t
  7821. The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7822. @item start_pts
  7823. The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7824. @item start_t
  7825. The time of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7826. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  7827. The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
  7828. values:
  7829. @table @option
  7830. @item I
  7831. @item P
  7832. @item B
  7833. @item S
  7834. @item SI
  7835. @item SP
  7836. @item BI
  7837. @end table
  7838. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  7839. The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
  7840. @table @option
  7841. @item PROGRESSIVE
  7842. The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
  7843. @item TOPFIRST
  7844. The frame is top-field-first.
  7845. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  7846. The frame is bottom-field-first.
  7847. @end table
  7848. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7849. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  7850. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7851. the number of samples in the current frame
  7852. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  7853. the input sample rate
  7854. @item key
  7855. This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
  7856. @item pos
  7857. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  7858. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  7859. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  7860. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  7861. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  7862. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  7863. @end table
  7864. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  7865. @subsection Examples
  7866. @itemize
  7867. @item
  7868. Select all frames in input:
  7869. @example
  7870. select
  7871. @end example
  7872. The example above is the same as:
  7873. @example
  7874. select=1
  7875. @end example
  7876. @item
  7877. Skip all frames:
  7878. @example
  7879. select=0
  7880. @end example
  7881. @item
  7882. Select only I-frames:
  7883. @example
  7884. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  7885. @end example
  7886. @item
  7887. Select one frame every 100:
  7888. @example
  7889. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  7890. @end example
  7891. @item
  7892. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7893. @example
  7894. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  7895. @end example
  7896. @item
  7897. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7898. @example
  7899. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  7900. @end example
  7901. @item
  7902. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  7903. @example
  7904. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  7905. @end example
  7906. @item
  7907. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  7908. @example
  7909. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  7910. @end example
  7911. @item
  7912. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  7913. @example
  7914. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  7915. @end example
  7916. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  7917. choice.
  7918. @item
  7919. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  7920. @example
  7921. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  7922. @end example
  7923. @end itemize
  7924. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  7925. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  7926. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  7927. filtergraph.
  7928. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  7929. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  7930. from that they act the same way.
  7931. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  7932. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  7933. @var{filename} option.
  7934. These filters accept the following options:
  7935. @table @option
  7936. @item commands, c
  7937. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  7938. @item filename, f
  7939. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  7940. filters.
  7941. @end table
  7942. @subsection Commands syntax
  7943. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  7944. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  7945. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  7946. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  7947. interval.
  7948. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  7949. @example
  7950. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  7951. @end example
  7952. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  7953. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  7954. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  7955. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  7956. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  7957. @var{END}.
  7958. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  7959. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  7960. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  7961. @example
  7962. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  7963. @end example
  7964. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  7965. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  7966. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  7967. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  7968. The following flags are recognized:
  7969. @table @option
  7970. @item enter
  7971. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  7972. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7973. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  7974. current is.
  7975. @item leave
  7976. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  7977. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7978. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  7979. current is not.
  7980. @end table
  7981. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  7982. assumed.
  7983. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  7984. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  7985. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  7986. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  7987. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  7988. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  7989. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  7990. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  7991. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  7992. follows:
  7993. @example
  7994. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  7995. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  7996. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  7997. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  7998. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  7999. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  8000. @end example
  8001. @subsection Examples
  8002. @itemize
  8003. @item
  8004. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  8005. @example
  8006. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  8007. @end example
  8008. @item
  8009. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  8010. @example
  8011. # show text in the interval 5-10
  8012. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  8013. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  8014. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  8015. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  8016. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  8017. [leave] hue s 1,
  8018. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  8019. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  8020. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  8021. @end example
  8022. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  8023. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  8024. @example
  8025. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  8026. @end example
  8027. @end itemize
  8028. @anchor{setpts}
  8029. @section setpts, asetpts
  8030. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  8031. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  8032. This filter accepts the following options:
  8033. @table @option
  8034. @item expr
  8035. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  8036. @end table
  8037. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  8038. constants:
  8039. @table @option
  8040. @item FRAME_RATE
  8041. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  8042. @item PTS
  8043. The presentation timestamp in input
  8044. @item N
  8045. The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  8046. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  8047. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  8048. The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  8049. audio)
  8050. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  8051. The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  8052. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  8053. The audio sample rate.
  8054. @item STARTPTS
  8055. The PTS of the first frame.
  8056. @item STARTT
  8057. the time in seconds of the first frame
  8058. @item INTERLACED
  8059. State whether the current frame is interlaced.
  8060. @item T
  8061. the time in seconds of the current frame
  8062. @item POS
  8063. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  8064. for the current frame
  8065. @item PREV_INPTS
  8066. The previous input PTS.
  8067. @item PREV_INT
  8068. previous input time in seconds
  8069. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  8070. The previous output PTS.
  8071. @item PREV_OUTT
  8072. previous output time in seconds
  8073. @item RTCTIME
  8074. The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds.. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  8075. instead.
  8076. @item RTCSTART
  8077. The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
  8078. @item TB
  8079. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8080. @end table
  8081. @subsection Examples
  8082. @itemize
  8083. @item
  8084. Start counting PTS from zero
  8085. @example
  8086. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  8087. @end example
  8088. @item
  8089. Apply fast motion effect:
  8090. @example
  8091. setpts=0.5*PTS
  8092. @end example
  8093. @item
  8094. Apply slow motion effect:
  8095. @example
  8096. setpts=2.0*PTS
  8097. @end example
  8098. @item
  8099. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  8100. @example
  8101. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  8102. @end example
  8103. @item
  8104. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  8105. @example
  8106. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  8107. @end example
  8108. @item
  8109. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  8110. @example
  8111. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  8112. @end example
  8113. @item
  8114. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  8115. @example
  8116. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  8117. @end example
  8118. @item
  8119. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  8120. @example
  8121. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  8122. @end example
  8123. @end itemize
  8124. @section settb, asettb
  8125. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  8126. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  8127. It accepts the following parameters:
  8128. @table @option
  8129. @item expr, tb
  8130. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  8131. @end table
  8132. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  8133. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  8134. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  8135. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  8136. @subsection Examples
  8137. @itemize
  8138. @item
  8139. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  8140. @example
  8141. settb=expr=1/25
  8142. @end example
  8143. @item
  8144. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  8145. @example
  8146. settb=expr=0.1
  8147. @end example
  8148. @item
  8149. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  8150. @example
  8151. settb=1+0.001
  8152. @end example
  8153. @item
  8154. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  8155. @example
  8156. settb=2*intb
  8157. @end example
  8158. @item
  8159. Set the default timebase value:
  8160. @example
  8161. settb=AVTB
  8162. @end example
  8163. @end itemize
  8164. @section showcqt
  8165. Convert input audio to a video output representing
  8166. frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
  8167. Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
  8168. The filter accepts the following options:
  8169. @table @option
  8170. @item volume
  8171. Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
  8172. variables:
  8173. @table @option
  8174. @item frequency, freq, f
  8175. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8176. @item timeclamp, tc
  8177. value of timeclamp option
  8178. @end table
  8179. and functions:
  8180. @table @option
  8181. @item a_weighting(f)
  8182. A-weighting of equal loudness
  8183. @item b_weighting(f)
  8184. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8185. @item c_weighting(f)
  8186. C-weighting of equal loudness
  8187. @end table
  8188. Default value is @code{16}.
  8189. @item tlength
  8190. Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
  8191. @table @option
  8192. @item frequency, freq, f
  8193. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8194. @item timeclamp, tc
  8195. value of timeclamp option
  8196. @end table
  8197. Default value is @code{384/f*tc/(384/f+tc)}.
  8198. @item timeclamp
  8199. Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
  8200. accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
  8201. event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
  8202. otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
  8203. (such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is @code{0.17}.
  8204. @item coeffclamp
  8205. Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
  8206. more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
  8207. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  8208. @item gamma
  8209. Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
  8210. makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  8211. Default value is @code{3.0}.
  8212. @item fontfile
  8213. Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
  8214. @item fontcolor
  8215. Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
  8216. integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
  8217. @table @option
  8218. @item frequency, freq, f
  8219. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8220. @item timeclamp, tc
  8221. value of timeclamp option
  8222. @end table
  8223. and functions:
  8224. @table @option
  8225. @item midi(f)
  8226. midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
  8227. @item r(x), g(x), b(x)
  8228. red, green, and blue value of intensity x
  8229. @end table
  8230. Default value is @code{st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
  8231. st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
  8232. r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))}
  8233. @item fullhd
  8234. If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
  8235. if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
  8236. @item fps
  8237. Specify video fps. Default value is @code{25}.
  8238. @item count
  8239. Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
  8240. per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
  8241. Default value is @code{6}.
  8242. @end table
  8243. @subsection Examples
  8244. @itemize
  8245. @item
  8246. Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
  8247. @example
  8248. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8249. @end example
  8250. @item
  8251. Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
  8252. @example
  8253. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
  8254. @end example
  8255. @item
  8256. Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
  8257. @example
  8258. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
  8259. @end example
  8260. @item
  8261. A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
  8262. @example
  8263. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8264. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8265. @end example
  8266. @item
  8267. Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
  8268. @example
  8269. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8270. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
  8271. @end example
  8272. @item
  8273. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8274. @example
  8275. volume=16*b_weighting(f)
  8276. @end example
  8277. @item
  8278. Lower Q factor
  8279. @example
  8280. tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
  8281. @end example
  8282. @item
  8283. Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
  8284. @example
  8285. fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
  8286. @end example
  8287. @end itemize
  8288. @section showspectrum
  8289. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  8290. spectrum.
  8291. The filter accepts the following options:
  8292. @table @option
  8293. @item size, s
  8294. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8295. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
  8296. @code{640x512}.
  8297. @item slide
  8298. Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
  8299. It accepts the following values:
  8300. @table @samp
  8301. @item replace
  8302. the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
  8303. @item scroll
  8304. the samples scroll from right to left
  8305. @item fullframe
  8306. frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
  8307. @end table
  8308. Default value is @code{replace}.
  8309. @item mode
  8310. Specify display mode.
  8311. It accepts the following values:
  8312. @table @samp
  8313. @item combined
  8314. all channels are displayed in the same row
  8315. @item separate
  8316. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  8317. @end table
  8318. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  8319. @item color
  8320. Specify display color mode.
  8321. It accepts the following values:
  8322. @table @samp
  8323. @item channel
  8324. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  8325. @item intensity
  8326. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  8327. @end table
  8328. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  8329. @item scale
  8330. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  8331. It accepts the following values:
  8332. @table @samp
  8333. @item lin
  8334. linear
  8335. @item sqrt
  8336. square root, default
  8337. @item cbrt
  8338. cubic root
  8339. @item log
  8340. logarithmic
  8341. @end table
  8342. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  8343. @item saturation
  8344. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  8345. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  8346. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  8347. Default value is @code{1}.
  8348. @item win_func
  8349. Set window function.
  8350. It accepts the following values:
  8351. @table @samp
  8352. @item none
  8353. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  8354. @item hann
  8355. Hann window
  8356. @item hamming
  8357. Hamming window
  8358. @item blackman
  8359. Blackman window
  8360. @end table
  8361. Default value is @code{hann}.
  8362. @end table
  8363. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  8364. section.
  8365. @subsection Examples
  8366. @itemize
  8367. @item
  8368. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  8369. @example
  8370. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  8371. @end example
  8372. @item
  8373. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  8374. @example
  8375. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  8376. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  8377. @end example
  8378. @end itemize
  8379. @section showwaves
  8380. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  8381. The filter accepts the following options:
  8382. @table @option
  8383. @item size, s
  8384. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8385. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
  8386. is "600x240".
  8387. @item mode
  8388. Set display mode.
  8389. Available values are:
  8390. @table @samp
  8391. @item point
  8392. Draw a point for each sample.
  8393. @item line
  8394. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  8395. @item p2p
  8396. Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
  8397. @item cline
  8398. Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
  8399. @end table
  8400. Default value is @code{point}.
  8401. @item n
  8402. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  8403. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  8404. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  8405. is not explicitly specified.
  8406. @item rate, r
  8407. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  8408. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  8409. @item split_channels
  8410. Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
  8411. @end table
  8412. @subsection Examples
  8413. @itemize
  8414. @item
  8415. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  8416. at the same time:
  8417. @example
  8418. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  8419. @end example
  8420. @item
  8421. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  8422. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  8423. @example
  8424. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  8425. @end example
  8426. @end itemize
  8427. @section split, asplit
  8428. Split input into several identical outputs.
  8429. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  8430. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  8431. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  8432. @subsection Examples
  8433. @itemize
  8434. @item
  8435. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  8436. @example
  8437. [in] split [out0][out1]
  8438. @end example
  8439. @item
  8440. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  8441. outputs, like in:
  8442. @example
  8443. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  8444. @end example
  8445. @item
  8446. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  8447. one padded:
  8448. @example
  8449. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  8450. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  8451. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  8452. @end example
  8453. @item
  8454. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  8455. @example
  8456. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  8457. @end example
  8458. @end itemize
  8459. @section zmq, azmq
  8460. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  8461. filters in the filtergraph.
  8462. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  8463. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  8464. audio filters.
  8465. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  8466. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  8467. For more information about libzmq see:
  8468. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  8469. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  8470. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  8471. @option{bind_address} option.
  8472. The received message must be in the form:
  8473. @example
  8474. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8475. @end example
  8476. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8477. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8478. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8479. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  8480. given @var{COMMAND}.
  8481. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  8482. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  8483. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  8484. @example
  8485. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  8486. @var{MESSAGE}
  8487. @end example
  8488. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  8489. @subsection Examples
  8490. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  8491. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  8492. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  8493. @example
  8494. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  8495. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  8496. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  8497. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  8498. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  8499. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  8500. @end example
  8501. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  8502. command can be used:
  8503. @example
  8504. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  8505. @end example
  8506. To change the right side:
  8507. @example
  8508. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  8509. @end example
  8510. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  8511. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  8512. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  8513. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  8514. @section amovie
  8515. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  8516. stream by default.
  8517. @anchor{movie}
  8518. @section movie
  8519. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  8520. It accepts the following parameters:
  8521. @table @option
  8522. @item filename
  8523. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
  8524. device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
  8525. @item format_name, f
  8526. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  8527. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
  8528. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  8529. @item seek_point, sp
  8530. Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
  8531. starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
  8532. @code{av_strtod}, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  8533. postfix. The default value is "0".
  8534. @item streams, s
  8535. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  8536. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  8537. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  8538. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  8539. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  8540. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  8541. @item stream_index, si
  8542. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  8543. the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
  8544. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  8545. audio instead of video.
  8546. @item loop
  8547. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  8548. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  8549. Default value is "1".
  8550. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  8551. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  8552. @end table
  8553. It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
  8554. a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
  8555. @example
  8556. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  8557. ^
  8558. |
  8559. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  8560. @end example
  8561. @subsection Examples
  8562. @itemize
  8563. @item
  8564. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
  8565. on top of the input labelled "in":
  8566. @example
  8567. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8568. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8569. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8570. @end example
  8571. @item
  8572. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  8573. labelled "in":
  8574. @example
  8575. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8576. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8577. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8578. @end example
  8579. @item
  8580. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  8581. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  8582. connected to the pad named "audio":
  8583. @example
  8584. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  8585. @end example
  8586. @end itemize
  8587. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES